[{"data":1,"prerenderedAt":1701},["ShallowReactive",2],{"search-api":3},[4,19,36,53,60,78,87,104,111,116,122,127,132,137,143,148,153,159,167,182,187,192,197,202,207,212,217,222,227,232,237,242,250,262,268,275,280,285,291,299,306,313,318,327,334,345,361,369,378,386,392,400,412,420,427,435,445,455,463,488,501,513,523,579,586,593,602,614,622,632,641,650,658,667,685,695,702,715,725,733,740,747,755,762,774,780,791,801,817,831,841,851,862,879,885,896,902,909,921,928,953,960,967,974,986,996,1005,1014,1021,1029,1042,1049,1056,1066,1073,1087,1097,1105,1116,1123,1135,1142,1151,1165,1175,1182,1191,1200,1209,1216,1225,1235,1242,1249,1256,1262,1269,1278,1286,1293,1300,1307,1315,1326,1335,1342,1351,1360,1368,1375,1384,1396,1410,1423,1432,1443,1454,1466,1476,1485,1499,1508,1516,1522,1536,1543,1554,1561,1576,1588,1601,1615,1623,1637,1649,1658,1666,1673,1684,1691],{"id":5,"path":6,"dir":7,"title":8,"description":9,"keywords":10,"body":18},"content:0.Getting started:0.First steps.md","/getting-started/first-steps","getting-started","First steps","",[11,12,13,14,15,16,17],"Step 1: Create a Riddle from scratch","Step 2: Name your Riddle","Step 3: Edit the cover page","Step 4: Add blocks","Step 5: Complete the setup for every block","Step 6: Publish your Riddle","Step 7: Embed your Riddle"," First steps Step 1: Create a Riddle from scratch Click on CREATE RIDDLE (or hit the \"C\" key on your keyboard), select one of the eight formats and click on Create from scratch . Step 2: Name your Riddle Type a name in the Name your Riddle box and click on CONTINUE (or do this later). Step 3: Edit the cover page This is the first thing your audience will see before starting the Riddle. Upload a picture, adapt the title as necessary, and add a description (if you want). Step 4: Add blocks One or more blocks will already be in your Riddle by defaut. To add more, click on ADD A BLOCK and select a question type from the drop-down menu. Step 5: Complete the setup for every block Insert an image, audio, or video. Write a question and answer(s). Repeat this step for as many questions or blocks as you want. Change any options you like for each block. Step 6: Publish your Riddle Click on Publish* , then PUBLISH again. Done! Your Riddle is live and you're ready to engage your audience. Click on the Landing page link to try out your Riddle. Step 7: Embed your Riddle You can embed your Riddle like a YouTube video. Go to the Embed/Landing page section and click on GET THE CODE . Copy it and paste it into your website publisher. Make as many content and style changes to your Riddle as you like at any time - just make sure you publish your Riddle again.",{"id":20,"path":21,"dir":7,"title":22,"description":23,"keywords":24,"body":35},"content:0.Getting started:1.Your free trial.md","/getting-started/your-free-trial","Your free trial","Welcome to Riddle!",[25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32,33,34],"Get creating!","Make your Riddle on brand!","Share the load!","Visit the Help Center.","Stay in the loop.","Get inspired!","Explore different content!","Get your demo.","Collaborate with your team!","Get 100 views!"," Your free trial Welcome to Riddle! In your free trial, you can: Create, publish, and analyze as many Riddles as you like. Have full access to all the features. Try out different features to see what would best suit your needs. Choose which of the four subscription plans is the right plan for you . Here are some tasks you can complete to make the most of your free trial. Get creating! Create your first Riddle quiz, poll/survey, personality quiz, predictor, leaderboard, form, and/or minigame. Then publish and embed it on your website for your audience to see. Make your Riddle on brand! Upload your company's logo to your Riddle so that your design matches your brand. Share the load! Fill out a form with a few bits of information about yourself and your company. This helps our Account Management Team support you and come up with any ideas for you and your specific use case. Visit the Help Center. Go to our Help Center for all feature questions. You can follow the step-by-step help guides for everything from content creation and settings to integrations and analytics. Stay in the loop. Sign up to our two newsletters : one for features and fixes (around every two weeks), one for bigger news and best practices (around every two months). Get inspired! Browse through and use our templates in the Creator or look at this list of top-performing quiz titles . Explore different content! There are 48 different Riddle blocks to mix and match for each use case you have. Get your demo. Book a free 1:1 call with our Customer Success Team. Our quiz experts will show you how Riddle can help your specific use case, or answer questions about key features you need. Collaborate with your team! As well as creating Riddles to work on alone, you can also create projects . Then you can add your colleagues and work on your content independanty or together. Get 100 views! Challenge yourself to reach and engage your target audience with the Riddles you have created so far. You can l ook at your stats either in Riddle itself or by connecting to Google Looker Studio if you sign up to the Enterprise plan.",{"id":37,"path":38,"dir":7,"title":39,"description":40,"keywords":41,"body":52},"content:0.Getting started:2.Top tips.md","/getting-started/top-tips","Top tips","Here are 10 insider tips from our own Riddle.com support and creation teams.",[42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51],"1. Mix it up.","2. Use media.","3. Whitelabel every detail to your brand.","4. Monetize your Riddle.","5. Send your audience to a webpage.","6. Increase sign-ups.","7. Keep it short and sweet.","8. Speak to your audience.","9. Use the single-select and multi-select blocks.","10. Add a timer."," Top tips Here are 10 insider tips from our own Riddle.com support and creation teams. 1. Mix it up. Use a variety of Riddle blocks. How to mix it up with different blocks . 2. Use media. This makes your Riddle immediately more attractive and engaging. How to format media. 3. Whitelabel every detail to your brand. Use your own logo, your own font, and your exact brand colors. How to customize the branding , use your own font , and edit using custom CSS . 4. Monetize your Riddle. Insert ads above or below your Riddle to generate revenue while your audience play your Riddle. How to configure ads . 5. Send your audience to a webpage. After your audience complete the Riddle, they can click on a button that takes them to your website. How to add a CTA button . 6. Increase sign-ups. Put your audience's results behind a required form wall so they have to enter their name and email, for example, before they see their results. You can send your leads to your tool of choice and even send automated emails with results and / or personalized offers based on your audience's answers. How to add an email block and make it required . 7. Keep it short and sweet. For regular Riddles, we recommend a maximum of 10 questions per Riddle. For specific use-cases you may of course need more. 8. Speak to your audience. Add a name block into your Riddle and then use that name to address that person in any block that follows. How to add a name block and then personalize any subsequent questions . 9. Use the single-select and multi-select blocks. 50-60% of your audience will be on smartphones. Free text entry takes longer to type than multiple choice questions or our other Riddle type formats. We recommend making no more than 30% of your questions free text. How to add all the different sorts of blocks . 10. Add a timer. This gives your quiz experience a dose of adrenaline. You can set a time limit for the quiz (“60 seconds to answer 10 questions”) or per question (“10 seconds per question”). How to add a quiz timer .",{"id":54,"path":55,"dir":9,"title":56,"description":57,"keywords":58,"body":59},"content:0.index.md","/","Riddle.com Help Center - Get started with Riddle.","Explore Riddle.com`s help guides and learn how to create interactive content to connect and convert",[]," EXPLORE HELP CENTER \n\u003Cpath d=\"M125.293 35.5517H165.603\" stroke=\"#66B6FF\" stroke-linejoin=\"round\"/ ",{"id":61,"path":62,"dir":63,"title":64,"description":65,"keywords":66,"body":77},"content:1.Content creation:0.Riddle types.md","/content-creation/riddle-types","content-creation","Content types","There are eight main types of interactive content you can create, plus two advanced tools for dynamic content management. Every type has specific features to suit your purpose. You can mix and match different blocks, collect leads, customize the design, and embed your content anywhere.",[67,68,69,70,71,72,73,74,75,76],"1. Quiz","2. Poll / Survey","3. Minigame","4. Personality quiz","5. Predictor","6. Leaderboard","7. Story","8. Form","Advanced content tools","Creation methods overview"," Content types There are eight main types of interactive content you can create, plus two advanced tools for dynamic content management. Every type has specific features to suit your purpose. You can mix and match different blocks, collect leads, customize the design, and embed your content anywhere. 1. Quiz Challenge your audience with right/wrong questions. Quizzes support 10 different question types including single-select, multi-select, type the answer, order it, tap and find, spot the difference, flashcard, typerush, guess it, and question bank. Create from: scratch, template, AI, URL, or file upload. Ideas: Knowledge tests, trivia challenges, educational assessments, product recommendation quizzes, onboarding tests. 2. Poll / Survey Get your audience's opinions and feedback. Polls and surveys support 12 question types including single-select, multi-select, reaction poll, upvote, order it, swiper, Likert/matrix, promoter score, rate it, tier list, this or that, and question bank. Create from: scratch, template, AI, URL, or file upload. Ideas: Customer satisfaction surveys, NPS scoring, product feedback, audience voting, employee engagement surveys, tier rankings. 3. Minigame Engage your audience with fun games. Five game types are available: Slot Machine, Wheel of Fortune, Sudoku, Crossword, and Minesweeper. Create from: scratch or template. Ideas: Spin the wheel for coupons or prizes, daily crossword challenges, slot machine point collection, sudoku puzzles, minesweeper competitions with leaderboards. 4. Personality quiz Engage and get to know your audience. Each answer is scored against multiple personality outcomes. The result with the highest total wins. You can also use attributes for secondary scoring dimensions. Create from: scratch, template, or AI. Ideas: \"Which city should I live in?\", product finders (\"Which smartphone is right for me?\"), career assessments, team role identifiers, style quizzes. 5. Predictor Let your audience predict the final result or winner. Two question types: Guess the Score (predict a numerical outcome) and Pick the Winner (choose the winning side). Connect to a leaderboard for competitions. Create from: scratch, template, or file upload. Ideas: Sports match predictions, election forecasts, award show predictions, fantasy leagues, prediction competitions. 6. Leaderboard Rank your audience based on their performance in quizzes and predictors. Connect one or more Riddles and display a live leaderboard with podium view. Create from: scratch only. Ideas: Weekly quiz leaderboards, season-long prediction rankings, team competitions, gamified learning progress. 7. Story Create interactive stories, listicles, and journeys. Combine text, images, videos, and social media posts to bring your content to life. Stories use a swipeable page-by-page format. Create from: scratch or template. Ideas: \"Top 10 food spots in NYC\", behind-the-scenes features, product showcases, interactive tutorials, news recaps, \"then vs. now\" comparisons. 8. Form Collect emails, names, and other information from your audience. Forms support 18 different field types including text inputs, dropdowns, radio buttons, ratings, date/time pickers, and CAPTCHA. Create from: scratch or template. Ideas: Contact forms, event registrations, prize draw entries, newsletter signups, feedback forms, booking requests. Advanced content tools Embed Placeholder Rotate between multiple Riddles on a single embed. Use conditions and schedules to automatically swap content - perfect for daily quizzes, A/B testing, or seasonal campaigns. Learn more about Embed Placeholders . Question Bank Build a pool of questions that can be dynamically pulled into your Quizzes or Polls. Each time someone takes your Riddle, they get a randomized selection from the bank - keeping content fresh and enabling large-scale question management. Learn more about Question Banks . Creation methods overview Type From scratch Template AI URL File upload Quiz x x x x x Poll / Survey x x x x x Minigame x x Personality quiz x x x Predictor x x x Leaderboard x Story x x Form x x ",{"id":79,"path":80,"dir":81,"title":82,"description":83,"keywords":84,"body":86},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:0.Create a quiz.md","/content-creation/quiz/create-a-quiz","quiz","Create a quiz","Challenge your audience with right/wrong questions. Quizzes support 10 different question types including single-select, multi-select, type the answer, order it, tap and find, spot the difference, flashcard, typerush, guess it, and question bank. Create from scratch, template, AI, URL, or file upload.",[85],"Get started"," Create a quiz Challenge your audience with right/wrong questions. Quizzes support 10 different question types including single-select, multi-select, type the answer, order it, tap and find, spot the difference, flashcard, typerush, guess it, and question bank. Create from scratch, template, AI, URL, or file upload. Ideas: Knowledge tests, trivia challenges, educational assessments, product recommendation quizzes, onboarding tests. Get started In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Quiz , and click on Create Quiz from scratch . Click on ADD A BLOCK and select a block from the Quiz blocks list. Complete your quiz using any combination of different quiz blocks. Under Results , edit the result block(s). Go to the Result blocks help guide . Publish your quiz. Embed your quiz.",{"id":88,"path":89,"dir":81,"title":90,"description":91,"keywords":92,"body":103},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:1.Quiz blocks.md","/content-creation/quiz/quiz-blocks","Quiz blocks","There are 10 quiz blocks you can add to your quiz. You can combine multiple block types in a single quiz.",[93,94,95,96,97,98,99,100,101,102],"Single-select","Multi-select","Tap and find","Order it","Type the answer","Spot the difference","Flashcard","Typerush","Guess it","Question Bank"," Quiz blocks There are 10 quiz blocks you can add to your quiz. You can combine multiple block types in a single quiz. Single-select Ask a question and let your audience select just one answer. Learn more about the Single-select block Multi-select Ask a question and let your audience select one or more answers. Learn more about the Multi-select block Tap and find Upload an image and let your audience find the hidden hotspots. Learn more about the Tap and find block Order it Let your audience put items in the correct order. Learn more about the Order it block Type the answer Ask a question and let your audience type the answer in a free text box. Learn more about the Type the answer block Spot the difference Upload two images and let your audience find the differences between them. Learn more about the Spot the difference block Flashcard Encourage self-directed learning with interactive flashcards. Learn more about the Flashcard block Typerush Ask a categorical question and let your audience type as many answers as they can. Learn more about the Typerush block Guess it Your audience guesses a person, place, or thing from a blurred image and clues. Learn more about the Guess it block Question Bank Automatically show a random selection of questions from a pre-built database. Learn more about the Question Bank block",{"id":105,"path":106,"dir":81,"title":93,"description":9,"keywords":107,"body":110},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:2.Single-select.md","/content-creation/quiz/single-select",[108,109],"Setup","Options"," Single-select Your audience picks one answer from a list of choices. This is the most common quiz block, perfect for trivia, knowledge tests, and multiple-choice exams. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Single choice . Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers into the Answer content fields. Insert explanations into the Answer explanations field(s) (optional). Select a correct answer. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for answer images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Right or wrong question When enabled, answers are marked as correct or incorrect. Disable this for opinion-based questions with no wrong answers. ON Scoring type Choose how points are awarded: Question (one score for the whole question) or Answer (individual score per answer). Question Score The number of points awarded for a correct answer. Only visible when Scoring type is set to Question. 1 Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF Change the order of answers Click and drag the six dots on the left of the answer field to move answers up or down. Shuffle answers Enable Shuffle answers to randomize the answer order each time the block loads. This prevents your audience from memorizing answer positions. Add answer descriptions Enable Description to add a description field below each answer. You can then enter descriptions under the Answer content . No wrong answers Disable Right or wrong question to remove right/wrong scoring. If you have answer explanations enabled, the explanation will have a neutral color instead of a right/wrong color. This is useful for opinion-based or survey-style questions within a quiz. Scoring per answer By default, one point is awarded per question. To change the score to per answer, change Scoring type from Question to Answer . You can then adjust the individual score values in the Answer content field. Answer explanations Option Description Default Show explanations Toggle to show or hide answer explanations after your audience answers. ON # of explanations Choose how many explanations to display: One for all answers , Right and wrong , or Per answer . One for all answers Answer explanation display Choose where the explanation appears: Overlay pop-up or Below question . Overlay pop-up Show media Toggle to show or hide images in the answer explanation. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for explanation images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack ",{"id":112,"path":113,"dir":81,"title":94,"description":9,"keywords":114,"body":115},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:3.Multi-select.md","/content-creation/quiz/multi-select",[108,109]," Multi-select Your audience can pick more than one answer. Multi-select questions are ideal when multiple responses can be correct, such as \"select all that apply\" formats. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Multi-select . Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add as many answers as you want by clicking on Add an answer . Click on the cross next to the answer to make it into a correct answer. Insert explanations into the Answer explanation field(s) (optional). Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for answer images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Right or wrong question When enabled, answers are marked as correct or incorrect. Disable this for opinion-based questions with no wrong answers. ON Scoring type Choose how points are awarded: Question (one score for the whole question) or Answer (individual score per answer). Question Score The number of points awarded for a correct answer. Only visible when Scoring type is set to Question. 1 # correct answers to get \"correct\" message The minimum number of correct answers your audience needs to select to receive the \"correct\" feedback. Only visible when Scoring type is set to Question. 1 Unlimited selections Allow your audience to select as many answers as they want with no limit. ON Show amount of possible choices Show your audience how many remaining options they can still select. OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF Change scoring By default, every correct answer is worth one point with one correct answer needed to get the point, and the audience has an unlimited number of answer selections. To have a score per question, enter your preferred Score and # correct answers to get \"correct\" message . To change the score per answer, change Scoring type to Answer and adjust the scores next to the answers. Limit the number of selections To limit the number of selections, disable Unlimited number of selections and then enter your chosen maximum. Show amount of possible choices To show your audience how many remaining options they can still select, enable Show amount of possible choices . Answer explanations Option Description Default Show explanations Toggle to show or hide answer explanations after your audience answers. ON # of explanations Choose how many explanations to display: One for all answers , Right and wrong , or Per answer . One for all answers Answer explanation display Choose where the explanation appears: Overlay pop-up or Below question . Overlay pop-up Show media Toggle to show or hide images in the answer explanation. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for explanation images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack",{"id":117,"path":118,"dir":81,"title":95,"description":9,"keywords":119,"body":121},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:4.Tap and find.md","/content-creation/quiz/tap-and-find",[108,120,109],"Hints"," Tap and find The answers are displayed as hotspots directly in the question image. Your audience taps the image to find the answers and a green circle appears when a correct point is found. Perfect for interactive image-based challenges. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Tap and find . Insert a question into the Title field. Insert an image into the Image field. A circular hotspot will appear which you can click and drag to the right place for a correct answer. Click on Add a hotspot and repeat the process for as many points on the picture as you like. To delete a hotspot, click on the three dots next to the hotspot and then DELETE . Change the hotspot from a circle to a rectangle by selecting Rectangle from the dropdown menu under the image. Hints You can add hints in the HINT (OPTIONAL) field. Your audience can choose to reveal the hint at any time. Hints give your audience a nudge in the right direction without giving away the answer. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Unlimited guesses Allow your audience to guess as many times as they want. When disabled, the number of guesses is limited. OFF Guesses icon Choose the icon displayed next to the guess counter. Heart # of guesses The number of guesses your audience gets before the block ends. Only visible when Unlimited guesses is disabled. 3 Display # guesses Toggle to show or hide the remaining guess count to your audience. ON Guesses text The label displayed next to the guess counter. Tries Scoring type Choose how points are awarded: Question (one score for the whole question). Question Score The number of points awarded for finding the correct hotspot(s). 1 'Show correct answer' button When enabled, a button appears that lets your audience reveal the correct hotspot positions after their guesses are used up. OFF Change the number of guesses By default, your audience has a limited number of guesses. To change this, go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . To change the number of guesses, type a number in the # of guesses or enable Unlimited guesses . To change the icon or text, select a Guesses icon and enter a Guesses text . Answer explanations Option Description Default Show explanations Toggle to show or hide answer explanations after your audience answers. ON # of explanations Choose how many explanations to display: One for all answers , Right and wrong , or Per answer . One for all answers Answer explanation display Choose where the explanation appears: Overlay pop-up or Below question . Overlay pop-up Show media Toggle to show or hide images in the answer explanation. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for explanation images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings",{"id":123,"path":124,"dir":81,"title":96,"description":9,"keywords":125,"body":126},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:5.Order it.md","/content-creation/quiz/order-it",[108,120,109]," Order it Your audience has to put the answers in the correct order. Great for ranking questions like \"Rank these players from lowest to highest scoring.\" Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Order-it block . Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add as many answers as you want by clicking on Add an answer . Hints You can add hints in the HINT (OPTIONAL) field. Your audience can choose to reveal the hint at any time. Hints give your audience a nudge in the right direction without giving away the correct order. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Unlimited guesses Allow your audience to guess as many times as they want. When disabled, the number of guesses is limited. OFF Guesses icon Choose the icon displayed next to the guess counter. Heart # of guesses The number of guesses your audience gets before the block ends. Only visible when Unlimited guesses is disabled. 3 Display # guesses Toggle to show or hide the remaining guess count to your audience. ON Guesses text The label displayed next to the guess counter. Tries Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for answer images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Scoring type Choose how points are awarded: Question (one score for the whole question). Question Score The number of points awarded for placing all answers in the correct order. 1 Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. Unlike Single-select, this is enabled by default for Order it blocks so your audience always starts with a shuffled set. ON Reshuffle choices after each submission When enabled, the answer choices are reshuffled after each incorrect submission, so your audience sees a fresh arrangement for their next attempt. OFF 'Show correct answer' button When enabled, a button appears that lets your audience reveal the correct order after their guesses are used up. OFF Enable rank order Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Rank order . Select a format and order. Reshuffle choices after each submission Enable Reshuffle choices after each submission to shuffle the answer choices after each incorrect attempt. This prevents your audience from simply remembering their previous arrangement. Show correct order Enable Show 'correct order' button to let your audience see the correct order after their guesses are used up. Answer explanations Option Description Default Show explanations Toggle to show or hide answer explanations after your audience answers. ON # of explanations Choose how many explanations to display: One for all answers , Right and wrong , or Per answer . One for all answers Answer explanation display Choose where the explanation appears: Overlay pop-up or Below question . Overlay pop-up Show media Toggle to show or hide images in the answer explanation. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for explanation images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Style Option Description Default Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or other layout options. Stack",{"id":128,"path":129,"dir":81,"title":97,"description":9,"keywords":130,"body":131},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:6.Type the answer.md","/content-creation/quiz/type-the-answer",[108,120,109]," Type the answer Your audience types their own answer to your question in a free text box, which replaces the answer buttons. Ideal for fill-in-the-blank questions where you want to test recall rather than recognition. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Type the answer . Insert a text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add as many answers as you want by clicking on Add an answer variant . Insert explanations into the Answer explanations field(s) (optional). Hints You can add hints in the HINT (OPTIONAL) field. Your audience can choose to reveal the hint at any time. Hints give your audience a nudge in the right direction without giving away the answer. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Unlimited guesses Allow your audience to guess as many times as they want. When disabled, the number of guesses is limited. OFF Guesses icon Choose the icon displayed next to the guess counter. Heart # of guesses The number of guesses your audience gets before the block ends. Only visible when Unlimited guesses is disabled. 3 Display # guesses Toggle to show or hide the remaining guess count to your audience. ON Guesses text The label displayed next to the guess counter. Tries Not case-sensitive When enabled, your audience's answer does not need to match the exact capitalization of the correct answer. For example, \"paris\" and \"Paris\" would both be accepted. ON Ignore space When enabled, extra or missing spaces in your audience's answer are ignored. For example, \"NewYork\" and \"New York\" would both be accepted. ON Scoring type Choose how points are awarded: Question (one score for the whole question). Question Score The number of points awarded for typing the correct answer. 1 'Show correct answer' button When enabled, a button appears that lets your audience reveal the correct answer after their guesses are used up. OFF Answer suffix A text label that appears after the text input field. Useful for adding units like \"kg\", \"km\", or \"years\" to clarify what format you expect. (empty) Set spelling options Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Not case-sensitive and/or Ignore space to be more forgiving with your audience's spelling. Answer explanations Option Description Default Show explanations Toggle to show or hide answer explanations after your audience answers. ON # of explanations Choose how many explanations to display: One for all answers , Right and wrong , or Per answer . One for all answers Answer explanation display Choose where the explanation appears: Overlay pop-up or Below question . Overlay pop-up Show media Toggle to show or hide images in the answer explanation. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for explanation images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings",{"id":133,"path":134,"dir":81,"title":98,"description":9,"keywords":135,"body":136},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:7.Spot the difference.md","/content-creation/quiz/spot-the-difference",[108,109]," Spot the difference Your audience can compare two images and spot the differences between them. Upload an original and a compare image, then place hotspots on the differences. When your audience taps correctly, the hotspot is revealed. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Spot the difference . Insert a question into the Title field. Insert an image into the Original image box. Insert an image into the Compare image box. A circular hotspot will appear which you can click and drag to the right place in one of the images for a correct answer. The corresponding hotspot in the other picture will move with it automatically. Click on Add a hotspot and repeat the process for as many points on the picture as you like. To delete a hotspot, click on the three dots next to the hotspot and then DELETE . Change the hotspot from a circle to a rectangle by selecting Rectangle from the dropdown menu under the image. Insert explanations into the Answer explanations field(s) (optional). Guesses By default, your audience has three guesses. To change this, go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . To change the number of guesses, type a number in the # of guesses field or enable Unlimited guesses . To change the icon or text, select a Guesses icon and enter a Guesses text . Hints You can add hints in the HINT (OPTIONAL) field. Your audience can choose to reveal the hint at any time. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Unlimited guesses Allow your audience to guess as many times as they want. When disabled, the number of guesses is limited. OFF Guesses icon Choose the icon displayed next to the guess counter. Heart # of guesses The number of guesses your audience gets before the block is locked. 3 Display # guesses Show the remaining number of guesses to your audience. ON Guesses text The label shown next to the guess counter. Tries Scoring type Choose how points are awarded. Question awards a fixed score for the entire block. Question Score The number of points awarded for a correct answer. 1 'Show correct answer' button Display a button that lets your audience reveal the correct answer after they run out of guesses. OFF Answer explanations Option Description Default Show explanations Show answer explanations after the audience answers. ON # of explanations Choose whether to show one explanation for all answers or individual explanations per answer. One for all answers Answer explanation display Choose how the explanation is displayed: as an overlay pop-up or inline. Overlay pop-up Show media Show media within the answer explanation. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio of the explanation media: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings",{"id":138,"path":139,"dir":81,"title":99,"description":9,"keywords":140,"body":142},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:8.Flashcard.md","/content-creation/quiz/flashcard",[108,109,141],"Quiz navigation with flashcards"," Flashcard Encourage self-directed learning with interactive flashcards. Each card has a front and back side. Your audience flips the card to reveal the answer and marks themselves as \"learnt\" or \"not learnt\". Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Flashcard . Fill in the front of the flashcard by inserting a question or phrase into the Title field. Enter an optional Description and Hint . Add an image to the front by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Fill in the back of the flashcard by inserting a question or phrase into the Title field. Enter an optional Description . Add an image to the back by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . To change the score for the flashcard, click on the options icon on the right of Flashcard , and enter the number of points you want to assign for a \"learnt\" flashcard. The default score is one. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio of the flashcard media: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Answers Option Description Default Score The number of points awarded when your audience marks the flashcard as \"learnt\". 1 Quiz navigation with flashcards Adding flashcards to a quiz changes how navigation works. Here is what you need to know. How flashcard navigation differs from standard blocks Action Standard block Flashcard block Answering Select an answer and submit Click Learnt or Not learnt , then marked as Done or click Next Next Goes to the next block in order Goes to the next unanswered flashcard first, then continues in order Back Returns to the previous block (re-voting not possible) Returns to the previous flashcard (re-voting is possible) Play again Shows unanswered questions first, then starts from the beginning Shows only unanswered flashcards until all are finished Reset flashcards - Restarts the entire quiz Key behaviors After clicking Learnt or Not learnt , your audience is taken to the next unanswered flashcard. Once all flashcards are answered, navigation continues with the next block in order. On flashcard blocks, the Back button allows re-voting. On standard blocks, it does not. The Play again button shows only unanswered flashcards until your audience has finished all of them. Remember user setting OFF: Progress is lost on page reload. Your audience starts fresh each time. ON (permission required): Your audience is asked for consent on the first flashcard or form. If they agree, progress is saved. ON (permission not required): Progress is saved automatically. On page reload, your audience is taken to their next unanswered question. Timer behavior When a Riddle timer expires, the current learnt/not-learnt status is preserved. Your audience is redirected to the first block and can continue from there. Please note: Forms that were automatically submitted during the quiz will not be re-submitted when navigating back, but they are displayed as answered and disabled.",{"id":144,"path":145,"dir":81,"title":100,"description":9,"keywords":146,"body":147},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:9.Typerush.md","/content-creation/quiz/typerush",[108,109]," Typerush Ask a categorical question and let your audience type as many answers as they can as quickly as possible. Typerush is perfect for fast-recall challenges like \"Name all US states\" or \"List all Premier League teams\". Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Typerush . Insert a question into the Title field. Insert all correct answers to your question. Each answer can have multiple variants (to account for typos or different spelling). Add variants by hitting enter after each variant. Add as many answers as you want by clicking on Add an answer . Add hints for each answer, to make it easier for your audience. Show hints You can hide hints if you do not want to show them. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and disable Show hints . Show row numbers Showing row numbers makes sense if your answers are in any logical order. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Show row numbers . Show answer media Answer media can be shown in addition to hints, or replacing them entirely. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Show answer media . Ignore space and not case-sensitive Allow variants of the correct answer with wrong spacing and capitalization. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Not case-sensitive and/or Ignore space . Scoring type Award points per right answer or only if the whole block was solved. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and change Scoring type to Question (score for the whole block) or Answer (score per individual answer). Reveal all answers after block timer expires or user gives up It is recommended to use a block timer on Typerush blocks to add an extra level of engagement. Your audience can choose to give up if they feel they have answered as much as they could. You can choose to show unsolved answers to your audience once the timer expires or they give up. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show hints Toggle to show or hide the hint column in the answer table. ON Hints / Answer order Choose the display order: Hints first shows the hint column before the answer column, Answers first shows the answer column before the hint column. Hints first Show row numbers Show numbered rows in the answer table. Useful when answers have a logical order. OFF Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images alongside each answer row. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for answer media: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Not case-sensitive Accept answers regardless of uppercase or lowercase letters. ON Ignore space Accept answers regardless of extra or missing spaces. ON Scoring type Choose how points are awarded. Answer awards points per correct answer. Question awards a single score for the entire block. Answer Max. score The maximum number of points that can be awarded for this block. 1 Reveal all answers after block timer expires / user gives up Show all unsolved answers to your audience once the timer runs out or they choose to give up. ON",{"id":149,"path":150,"dir":81,"title":101,"description":9,"keywords":151,"body":152},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:10.Guess it.md","/content-creation/quiz/guess-it",[108,109]," Guess it Your audience has to work out a person, place, or thing based on a blurred image and a set of clues. Every wrong guess sharpens the picture and reveals the next hint. Perfect for \"Guess the player\" or \"Guess the city\" style content. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Guess it . Fill in the GUESS THE... title field to give your audience a framework. Click on the camera icon to upload an image via upload, Your Media Library, Google, or Pexels. To make this block accessible, add an alt tag, describing the image without giving away the answer. This means screen readers can inform your audience of the colors and so on without giving them the answer. For example, if you have titled the block \"Guess the player\" and use a picture of Cristiano Ronaldo, enter an alt tag like \"blurred image of a player wearing a red shirt\". Enter figures or texts about the person or thing in the number/text fields, replacing the default zeros, and a corresponding piece of information in the Enter a fact fields, e.g. 5 and Ballon d'Or Awards. Enter hints in the Hint #1-4 boxes, e.g. \"This person's fitness is legendary.\" Enter a number of guesses between 1 and 6. 6 is the default. Reposition the hints on the line of guesses using the circles and key icons (optional). Click on a key icon to select a hint and then click on a white circle to assign it a new position. Enter the correct answer. Click on ADD ANSWER VARIANT and enter a variant in the new field that is created, if necessary. Click on the eyelid icon to see what the fully revealed image will look like. Change fact type The facts are stats-based by default. To change the facts to be text-based, click on the options icon in the top right of the Guess it card, and select Text-based from the dropdown menu next to Fact type . Set spelling options Go to the options icon in the top right corner of the Guess it card and enable Not case-sensitive and/or Ignore space . Please note: Data input in this block is saved in the front end to be able to auto submit answers and finish the Riddle. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Fact type Choose between Stats-based (numbers with labels) or Text-based (free-text facts). Stats-based Scoring A player starts with as many points as guesses and loses one point for each wrong attempt. - Not case-sensitive Accept answers regardless of uppercase or lowercase letters. ON Ignore space Accept answers regardless of extra or missing spaces. ON",{"id":154,"path":155,"dir":81,"title":102,"description":9,"keywords":156,"body":158},"content:1.Content creation:1.Quiz:11.Question Bank.md","/content-creation/quiz/question-bank",[108,157],"Related articles"," Question Bank Use a Question Bank to display a random assortment of questions from a pre-built database. Ideal for keeping your audience engaged with fresh content daily without manually creating new quizzes. Setup Before you can use a Question Bank in your quiz, you need to create and publish a Question Bank . Implement the bank in a quiz Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Question Bank . Select your bank: Choose the Question Bank you have already created and published. Set parameters: Filter by category or difficulty level, then choose how many questions to display at once (e.g. 5 general knowledge questions and 5 science questions). Configure refresh intervals The real power of the Question Bank lies in its ability to automatically update the quiz for your audience. Time-based refresh: Select the gear icon , open options, and choose Time-Based refresh. Set the interval: Choose how often the questions should change - such as every hour, every 10 hours, or every 24 hours. Pro tip: For the best results, create a large and deep dataset so the refresh interval always provides a truly new experience for your audience. Use case idea: Combine the Question Bank with the Leaderboard function. You can show a new set of questions every day, allowing your audience to return daily to earn more points and climb the rankings. Related articles Create a Question Bank for quizzes Create a Question Bank for polls and surveys",{"id":160,"path":161,"dir":162,"title":163,"description":164,"keywords":165,"body":166},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:0.Create a Poll or survey.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/create-a-poll-or-survey","poll-and-survey","Create a poll or survey","Get your audience's opinions and feedback. Polls and surveys support 12 question types including single-select, multi-select, reaction poll, upvote, order it, swiper, Likert/matrix, promoter score, rate it, tier list, this or that, and question bank. Create from scratch, template, AI, URL, or file upload.",[85]," Create a poll or survey Get your audience's opinions and feedback. Polls and surveys support 12 question types including single-select, multi-select, reaction poll, upvote, order it, swiper, Likert/matrix, promoter score, rate it, tier list, this or that, and question bank. Create from scratch, template, AI, URL, or file upload. Ideas: Customer satisfaction surveys, NPS scoring, product feedback, audience voting, employee engagement surveys, tier rankings. Get started In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Poll/Survey , and click on Create Poll/Survey from scratch . Click on ADD A BLOCK and select a block from the Poll and survey blocks list. Complete your poll or survey using any combination of different blocks. Under Results , edit the result block(s). Go to the Result blocks help guide . Publish your poll or survey. Embed your poll or survey.",{"id":168,"path":169,"dir":162,"title":170,"description":171,"keywords":172,"body":181},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:1.Poll and survey blocks.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/poll-and-survey-blocks","Poll and survey blocks","There are 12 poll and survey blocks you can add to your poll or survey. You can combine multiple block types in a single poll or survey.",[93,94,173,174,96,175,176,177,178,179,180,102],"Reaction poll","Upvote","Swiper","Likert / Matrix","Promoter Score","Rate it","Tier List","This or That"," Poll and survey blocks There are 12 poll and survey blocks you can add to your poll or survey. You can combine multiple block types in a single poll or survey. Single-select Your audience picks one answer from a list of choices. Learn more about the Single-select block Multi-select Your audience can pick more than one answer. Learn more about the Multi-select block Reaction poll Collect audience feedback using a slider ranging from strongly disagree to strongly agree. Learn more about the Reaction poll block Upvote A poll combined with a list where your audience upvotes favorites and watches the list reorder by popularity. Learn more about the Upvote block Order it Let your audience put the answers in their preferred or the correct order. Learn more about the Order it block Swiper Your audience selects their preference by swiping or choosing between options. Learn more about the Swiper block Likert / Matrix Create a series of statements with scaled response options for structured feedback. Learn more about the Likert / Matrix block Promoter Score Ask your audience how likely they are to recommend your product or service using a 0-10 NPS scale. Learn more about the Promoter Score block Rate it Gather quick feedback on multiple items using stars or score ratings. Learn more about the Rate it block Tier List Let your audience rank items into customizable tiers by dragging and dropping. Learn more about the Tier List block This or That Your audience chooses between two options at a time until one option wins. Learn more about the This or That block Question Bank Automatically show a random selection of questions from a pre-built database. Learn more about the Question Bank block",{"id":183,"path":184,"dir":162,"title":93,"description":9,"keywords":185,"body":186},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:2.Single-select.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/single-select",[108,109]," Single-select Your audience picks one answer from a list of choices. The most common poll block, ideal for quick audience votes and opinion gathering. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Single-select. Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers into the Answer content fields. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. OFF Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF 'Other' answer option When enabled, an additional \"Other\" text field appears as the last answer choice, allowing your audience to type in a custom response. This is a poll-exclusive feature. OFF Change the order of answers Click and drag the six dots on the left of the answer field to move answers up or down. Shuffle answers Enable Shuffle answers to randomize the answer order each time the block loads. This prevents your audience from being influenced by answer positions. Add answer descriptions Enable Description to add a description field below each answer. You can then enter descriptions under the Answer content . 'Other' answer option Enable 'Other' answer option to add a free-text field as the last answer choice. Your audience can type in a custom response if none of the predefined answers fit. You can customize the placeholder text in the text field on the left. Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":188,"path":189,"dir":162,"title":94,"description":9,"keywords":190,"body":191},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:3.Multi-select.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/multi-select",[108,109]," Multi-select Your audience can pick more than one answer. Perfect for \"select all that apply\" survey questions and multi-choice voting. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Multi-select. Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add as many answers as you want by clicking on Add an answer . Set how many items your audience can vote for by going to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and typing or using the up and down arrows to change the number. To show your audience how many remaining options they can still select, go to the options icon on the right of Answer content and enable Show amount of possible choices . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. OFF Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Unlimited choices Allow your audience to select as many answers as they want with no limit. When disabled, a maximum number of selections can be set. ON Show amount of possible choices Show your audience how many remaining options they can still select. Only visible when Unlimited choices is disabled. OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF 'Other' answer option When enabled, an additional \"Other\" text field appears as the last answer choice, allowing your audience to type in a custom response. This is a poll-exclusive feature. OFF Change the order of answers Click and drag the six dots on the left of the answer field to move answers up or down. Limit the number of selections To limit the number of selections, disable Unlimited choices and then enter your chosen maximum. Show amount of possible choices Enable Show amount of possible choices to display a counter showing your audience how many remaining options they can still select. Shuffle answers Enable Shuffle answers to randomize the answer order each time the block loads. This prevents your audience from being influenced by answer positions. Add answer descriptions Enable Description to add a description field below each answer. You can then enter descriptions under the Answer content . 'Other' answer option Enable 'Other' answer option to add a free-text field as the last answer choice. Your audience can type in a custom response if none of the predefined answers fit. You can customize the placeholder text in the text field on the left. Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":193,"path":194,"dir":162,"title":173,"description":9,"keywords":195,"body":196},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:4.Reaction poll.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/reaction-poll",[108,109]," Reaction poll A slider-based feedback block. Your audience moves a slider to express their level of agreement or opinion. Great for sentiment analysis and quick mood checks. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Reaction poll. Type a question or text into the Title field and add a description if you like. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the range of answers. You can choose between: Agree / disagree (default) Like / dislike Custom Customized ranges are then automatically applied to all your Riddle's poll questions. Add or delete options by clicking on ADD LEVEL or DELETE LEVEL . Reaction range options The Reaction poll uses a predefined range of answers that your audience selects using a slider. Choose one of the following range types: Agree / disagree (default) The default range includes seven levels with color-coded labels: Level Label Color -3 Strongly disagree Red -2 Disagree Orange-red -1 Slightly disagree Pink 0 Neither agree nor disagree Grey 1 Slightly agree Light green 2 Agree Green 3 Strongly agree Dark green Like / dislike A simpler range with fewer levels for quick like/dislike feedback. Custom Create your own range by editing labels and adding or removing levels with the ADD LEVEL and DELETE LEVEL buttons. Custom ranges are applied to all Reaction poll questions in your Riddle. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. The Reaction poll has very minimal options compared to other poll blocks - there are no Answers or Style sections. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":198,"path":199,"dir":162,"title":174,"description":9,"keywords":200,"body":201},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:5.Upvote.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/upvote",[108,109]," Upvote A poll combined with a list (listicle). Your audience can upvote their favorite entries and watch the list reorder automatically by popularity. Great for community-driven rankings and \"Top 10\" lists. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Upvote . Type a question or text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add more answers by clicking on ADD AN ANSWER , delete answers by clicking on the three dots next to the answer and selecting DELETE . Set how many times your audience can vote by going to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and typing or using the up and down arrows to change the number. To show your audience how many remaining options they can still select, go to the options icon on the right of Answer content and enable Show amount of possible choices . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. OFF Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Show amount of possible choices Show your audience how many remaining upvotes they have left. ON # of upvotes per user The number of upvotes each user can distribute across the answer choices. 1 Real-time voting view When enabled, your audience sees the list reorder live as votes come in, showing community-wide voting results in real time. ON Real-time voting view Enable Real-time voting view to let your audience see the list reorder live as votes come in. This creates an engaging, dynamic experience where your audience can watch the rankings shift in real time based on community votes. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Real-time voting view . Show amount of possible choices Enable Show amount of possible choices to display a counter showing your audience how many remaining upvotes they have left. Set the number of upvotes per user Use # of upvotes per user to control how many upvotes each participant can distribute. Set this to 1 to force your audience to pick a single favorite, or increase it to allow them to upvote multiple entries. Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":203,"path":204,"dir":162,"title":96,"description":9,"keywords":205,"body":206},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:6.Order it.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/order-it",[108,109]," Order it Your audience puts answers in their preferred order or the correct order. Ideal for ranking surveys like \"Tell us what the best to worst workplace benefits are for employees.\" Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Order-it block. Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add more answers by clicking on ADD AN ANSWER , delete answers by clicking on the three dots next to the answer and selecting DELETE . Enable ranking by going to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enabling Rank order . Select a format and order. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. OFF Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Up / down buttons When enabled, arrow buttons appear next to each answer so your audience can reorder by clicking up/down instead of drag-and-drop only. ON Rank order When enabled, numbered ranks are displayed next to each answer. Choose a format (numbers, letters, or Roman numerals) and order (ascending or descending). OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF Up / down buttons Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Up / down buttons to give your audience arrow buttons for reordering instead of drag-and-drop only. This makes the block more accessible and easier to use, especially on mobile devices. Enable rank order Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Rank order . Select a format and order. This adds numbered ranks next to each answer so your audience can see the position of each item as they reorder the list. Shuffle answers Enable Shuffle answers to randomize the answer order each time the block loads. This ensures every participant starts with a different arrangement. Style Option Description Default Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":208,"path":209,"dir":162,"title":175,"description":9,"keywords":210,"body":211},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:7.Swiper.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/swiper",[108,109]," Swiper Your audience selects their preference by choosing between options - like or dislike. The Swiper uses an engaging swipe or button interface for quick binary feedback. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Swiper . Type a question or text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Enter text into the Dislike title box and Like title box (optional). Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Button type Choose the style of the Dislike/Like buttons from the dropdown menu. Riddle style Button Dislike color The background color of the Dislike button. Black Icon Dislike color The icon color inside the Dislike button. White Button Like color The background color of the Like button. Green Icon Like color The icon color inside the Like button. Dark Change the Dislike / Like buttons Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Click on the arrow next to Button type and choose an option from the dropdown menu. For each of the four options, click on the buttons in the Riddle on the left to change the emoji, picture, or text. Customize the button / icon colors Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Click on the arrow next to Button / Icon Dislike / Like colors and select or enter a color. You can customize each of the four color settings independently to match your brand or design preferences. Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":213,"path":214,"dir":162,"title":176,"description":9,"keywords":215,"body":216},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:8.Likert Matrix.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/likert-matrix",[108,109]," Likert / Matrix Create a series of closed-ended statements or questions with scaled response options. Ideal for structured feedback, employee satisfaction surveys, and research questionnaires. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Likert / Matrix . Type a question or text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Enter a statement or question into the Add a question field. Click on ADD QUESTION and enter statements or questions for as many questions as you like. The default scale labels range from strongly agree to strongly disagree. Click directly on the text to edit these scale labels. Click on ADD SCALE to add another item / label to the scale, and enter text into the Title field that appears on the right. To delete a scale item, hover over the text, and click on the trash can icon. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Only one choice per question When enabled, your audience can only select one scale option per question. Disable this to allow multiple selections per question row. ON Custom scale values When enabled, you can assign custom numeric values to each scale item instead of the default ascending values (1 to 5). OFF Shuffle questions Randomize the order of questions each time the block loads. This prevents order bias in survey responses. OFF N/A option When enabled, a \"N/A\" (Not Applicable) option is added to the right of the scale items, allowing respondents to skip individual questions. OFF Stack scale on small screens When enabled, the scale items are displayed as a stacked vertical list on smaller screens instead of a horizontal row. This improves readability on mobile devices. ON Allow more than one choice per question Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Disable Only one choice per question to allow your audience to check more than one box. This is enabled by default. Set up custom scale values Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . By default the scale ascends from one to five across the label items. Enable Custom scale values to personalize this. Type a number or use the up and down arrows to change the scale. Show N/A on scale Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable N/A option . An N/A item will appear on the right of any other scale items in your questionnaire. Stack scales on small screens You can switch to \"mobile\" view so that the scale appears stacked as a list rather than in a horizontal line if you prefer. Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable Stack scale on small screens . Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":218,"path":219,"dir":162,"title":177,"description":9,"keywords":220,"body":221},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:9.Promoter Score.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/promoter-score",[108,109]," Promoter Score Ask your audience how likely they are to recommend your product or service using a standard 0-10 NPS (Net Promoter Score) scale. The fixed scale automatically categorizes respondents as Detractors (0-6), Passives (7-8), or Promoters (9-10). Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Promoter Score . Type a question or text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Edit the Labels for \"positive\"/\"negative\" under Answer content (optional). The default labels are \"positive\" and \"negative\". Analyze your Promoter Scores . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. The Promoter Score block has a minimal set of options because the 0-10 NPS scale is fixed and cannot be modified. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Related articles: Poll and survey blocks Analyze your Promoter Scores",{"id":223,"path":224,"dir":162,"title":178,"description":9,"keywords":225,"body":226},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:10.Rate it.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/rate-it",[108,109]," Rate it Gather quick feedback on multiple items using stars or score ratings. Your audience rates each item individually, and you can optionally reorder items by rating after submission. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Rate it . Type a question or text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Under Answer content , enter the names, products, or services to be rated. Click on ADD AN ANSWER and enter text for as many options as you like. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Rating scale Choose the rating method: Stars (star icons) or Grades (numeric score). Stars Amount of stars The number of stars available for rating. Only visible when Rating scale is set to Stars. 5 Best grade The highest grade value. Only visible when Rating scale is set to Grades. 1 Worst grade The lowest grade value. Only visible when Rating scale is set to Grades. 6 Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio for answer images: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. Wide (16:9) Description Show a description field below each answer. OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF Sort after rating When enabled, choices are automatically reordered from highest to lowest rating after your audience submits their ratings. OFF Add images to choices Go to the options icon on the right of Answer content . Enable Show answer media . Click on the media icon next to each answer choice under Answer content to upload media for a choice. Use stars rating scale Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Click on the arrow next to Rating scale and ensure Stars is selected. Enter the number of stars next to Amount of stars . Use score rating scale (Grades) Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Click on the arrow next to Rating scale and select Grades . Use the up and down arrows or enter a number for Best grade and Worst grade . Sort after rating Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable Sort after rating to automatically reorder choices from highest to lowest after rating is submitted. Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Row (horizontal grid) or Stack (vertical list). Row Show choices in multiple rows When enabled, answer choices wrap into multiple rows instead of scrolling horizontally. This is useful when you have many items to rate. ON Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":228,"path":229,"dir":162,"title":179,"description":9,"keywords":230,"body":231},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:11.Tier List.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/tier-list",[108,109]," Tier List Let your audience rank items into customizable tiers (S, A, B, C, D, F) by dragging and dropping. Perfect for ranking products, preferences, or priorities. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Tier List . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Under Tiers , define the ranking categories for your tier list. By default, six tiers are provided: S, A, B, C, D, and F, each with a distinct color. Edit each tier's label by clicking on the text field next to the color. Reorder tiers by dragging the handle on the left. Delete a tier by clicking the trash icon on the right. Add more tiers by clicking ADD TIER . Under Items , add the options your audience will sort into the tiers. Click on ADD OPTION to create new items. Each item can have a title and an image. To delete or copy an item, click on the three dots on the item tile. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide images on each tier list item. ON Media orientation Choose the aspect ratio for item images: Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. Wide (16:9) Show title Toggle to show or hide the title text on each tier list item. ON Show media on items Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable Show media to allow images on each tier list item. Select a Media orientation from the dropdown menu (default: Wide 16:9). Show item titles Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable or disable Show title to control whether item titles are displayed alongside images. Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":233,"path":234,"dir":162,"title":180,"description":9,"keywords":235,"body":236},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:12.This or That.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/this-or-that",[108,109]," This or That Your audience chooses between two options at a time in a tournament-style voting format until one option wins. Ideal for \"Would you rather\" style content, product comparisons, and fun engagement pieces. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select This or That . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Under Choices , add the options your audience will vote between. Each option has an image upload area and a title field. Click on ADD OPTION to add more choices. Your audience will vote on pairs until one option wins. To delete or copy an option, click on the three dots on the option tile. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Required Option Description Default Required When enabled, your audience must answer this block before proceeding. When disabled, a \"Skip\" button appears. ON Answers Option Description Default Show progress bar When enabled, a visual indicator shows how far through the voting rounds your audience has progressed. OFF Show title Toggle to show or hide the title text on each option. ON Show media Toggle to show or hide images on each option. ON Media orientation Choose the aspect ratio for option images: Square 1:1, Wide 16:9, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. Square (1:1) Separator Choose the label displayed between the two options during each voting round. VS Show progress bar Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable Show progress bar to display a visual indicator of how far through the voting rounds your audience has progressed. Customize the separator Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Click on the arrow next to Separator and choose from the available options (default: \"VS\"). Show titles and media Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content . Enable or disable Show title and Show media to control how options are displayed. Select a Media orientation (default: Square 1:1). Related articles: Poll and survey blocks",{"id":238,"path":239,"dir":162,"title":102,"description":9,"keywords":240,"body":241},"content:1.Content creation:2.Poll and survey:13.Question Bank.md","/content-creation/poll-and-survey/question-bank",[108,157]," Question Bank Use a Question Bank to automatically show a random assortment of questions from a pre-built database. For polls and surveys, it's a great way to collect feedback across a wide range of topics without needing to manually create new content every day. Setup Before you can use a Question Bank in your poll or survey, you need to create and publish a Question Bank . Implement the bank in a poll or survey Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Question Bank . Select your bank: Choose the Question Bank you have already created and published. Set parameters: Filter by category or difficulty level, then choose how many questions to display at once (e.g. 5 general knowledge questions and 1 science question). Configure refresh intervals The real power of the Question Bank lies in its ability to automatically update the poll or survey for your audience. Time-based refresh: Select the gear icon , open options, and choose Time-Based refresh. Set the interval: Set a refresh cadence (for example, every hour, every 10 hours, or every 24 hours). Continuous engagement: Once the interval passes, the system pulls a new set of questions that match your parameters - keeping your audience engaged with minimal effort. Use case idea: Combine the Question Bank with rotating poll questions to keep your audience engaged over time. For example, a daily customer satisfaction poll that automatically cycles through different feedback topics. Related articles Create a Question Bank for polls and surveys Create a Question Bank for quizzes",{"id":243,"path":244,"dir":245,"title":246,"description":247,"keywords":248,"body":249},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:0.Create a minigame.md","/content-creation/minigame/create-a-minigame","minigame","Create a minigame","Engage your audience with fun, interactive games. Minigames are perfect for promotions, giveaways, daily challenges, and boosting time-on-site. Five game types are available: Slot Machine, Wheel of Fortune, Sudoku, Crossword, and Minesweeper.",[85]," Create a minigame Engage your audience with fun, interactive games. Minigames are perfect for promotions, giveaways, daily challenges, and boosting time-on-site. Five game types are available: Slot Machine , Wheel of Fortune , Sudoku , Crossword , and Minesweeper . Ideas: Spin the wheel for coupons or prizes, daily crossword challenges, slot machine point collection, sudoku puzzles, minesweeper competitions with leaderboards. Get started In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Minigame , and click on Create Minigame from scratch . Add media, a title, and description (optional). Add more blocks to your minigame by clicking on ADD A BLOCK and selecting a block from the pop-up menu. See all available Minigame blocks . Under Results , edit the result block(s). Go to the Result blocks help guide . Publish your minigame. Embed your minigame.",{"id":251,"path":252,"dir":245,"title":253,"description":254,"keywords":255,"body":261},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:1.Minigame blocks.md","/content-creation/minigame/minigame-blocks","Minigame blocks","There are five minigame blocks you can add to your minigame. You can combine multiple game blocks in a single minigame.",[256,257,258,259,260],"Slot Machine","Wheel of Fortune","Sudoku","Crossword","Minesweeper"," Minigame blocks There are five minigame blocks you can add to your minigame. You can combine multiple game blocks in a single minigame. Slot Machine Add an exciting slot machine game where your audience spins for matching symbols. Learn more about the Slot Machine block Wheel of Fortune Your audience spins the wheel for random prizes, coupons, or surprises. Learn more about the Wheel of Fortune block Sudoku Engage your audience with the classic logic-based, number-placement puzzle. Learn more about the Sudoku block Crossword Challenge your audience with a themed crossword puzzle. Learn more about the Crossword block Minesweeper Engage your audience with the classic Minesweeper puzzle game. Customize the grid, mines, and game mode for competitive play. Learn more about the Minesweeper block",{"id":263,"path":264,"dir":245,"title":265,"description":9,"keywords":266,"body":267},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:2.Slot machine.md","/content-creation/minigame/slot-machine","Slot machine",[108,109]," Slot machine Your audience plays a slot machine game, spinning reels to match symbols. The slot machine is perfect for promotions, giveaways, and gamified lead generation where you want to add an element of chance. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Slot machine . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Answers Option Description Default Start balance The number of credits your audience starts with. Type a number or use the up/down arrows to adjust. 10 Winning probability How often the slot machine pays out. Choose Low , Medium , or High from the dropdown. Medium Replace emojis with your own images Replace each default emoji symbol with a custom image or icon. Not all emojis need to be changed. OFF Adjusting the start balance To edit the Start balance , click on the options icon and type in or use the up and down arrows to change the default balance of 10. Adjusting the winning probability To edit the Winning probability , click on the options icon and select Low , Medium , or High from the dropdown menu. Adding your own images You can replace each emoji with a custom image or icon. Click on the options icon and enable Replace emojis with your own images . You can then choose a replacement for each emoji - not all are required to change.",{"id":269,"path":270,"dir":245,"title":271,"description":9,"keywords":272,"body":274},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:3.Wheel of fortune.md","/content-creation/minigame/wheel-of-fortune","Wheel of fortune",[108,109,273],"Add raffle mechanics"," Wheel of fortune Your audience spins the wheel for random prizes or surprises. The Wheel of Fortune is ideal for raffles, coupon giveaways, and promotions where you want to reward your audience with randomized outcomes. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Wheel of fortune . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Under Content , edit or add the title and description for each wheel segment, and select a rule from the dropdown menu: Winning field , Losing field , or Spin again . To add a wheel segment, click on ADD AN ANSWER . To copy or delete a wheel segment, click on the three dots on the right of any element and click on COPY or DELETE . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide media on each wheel segment. When enabled, click on the media icon to the left of a segment and select your media type and upload method. Select a media orientation . OFF Adjust weighting Adjust the percentage of the wheel for any given segment using sliders. The sum of all adjusted weights must be 100 per cent. OFF 'Copy to clipboard' button for wins Show a button that lets winners easily copy a coupon code or prize text to their clipboard. ON Show icons for Win, Lose, Free Spin Display icons next to the segment labels indicating their type. OFF Customize colors Select text and background colors for the wheel segments. There are three background colors and three text colors that alternate across the segments. OFF Adding media to wheel segments To add an image to each wheel segment, click on the options icon, enable Show media , and then click on the media icon to the left of a segment to select your media type and upload method. Select a media orientation . Adjusting weighting To adjust weighting, click on the options icon, enable Adjust weighting , and then use the slider to change the percentage of the wheel for any given segment. The sum of the adjusted weights must be 100 per cent. Customizing colors To change colors, click on the options icon, enable Customize colors , and in the list that appears, select text and background colors. There are three background colors and three text colors. Add raffle mechanics In the Winning field segments, you can add coupon codes. If you want your audience to easily copy them to their clipboard, go to options and enable 'Copy to clipboard' button for wins . If you want to show different next blocks for winners and losers, you can do so in the branching logic and select the branching type answer .",{"id":276,"path":277,"dir":245,"title":258,"description":9,"keywords":278,"body":279},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:4.Sudoku.md","/content-creation/minigame/sudoku",[108,109]," Sudoku Engage your audience with the classic logic-based, number-placement puzzle. Sudoku is great for daily challenges, educational content, and keeping your audience engaged for longer periods. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Sudoku . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Under Minigame , use the slider to define a level of difficulty between 0 (easy) and 100 (hard). Click on REGENERATE to create a new sudoku puzzle. Click on SHOW SOLUTION to see the completed sudoku with the missing numbers in black and the original starting numbers in grey. Under Success message , enter a text for your audience once they complete the sudoku correctly. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings To remove media from the block, click on the options icon and disable Show media . Select a media ratio from the dropdown menu. Answers Option Description Default Score The number of points awarded for completing the sudoku. 1 Game settings Option Description Default Show success message Display a congratulations message when the sudoku is completed correctly. ON Show success message media Add an image or video to the success message. OFF To add media to the success message, click on the options icon and enable Show success message media . To disable the success message entirely, click on the options icon and disable Show success message . Sudoku settings Option Description Default Show rules to user Display a \"How to play\" overview explaining the rules of sudoku. ON Allow error checking Let your audience check their progress for mistakes. OFF Allow conflict highlighting Highlight conflicting numbers so your audience can see errors in real time. OFF Refresh interval Automatically generate a new sudoku puzzle at a set interval. Options: None, Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly. None ",{"id":281,"path":282,"dir":245,"title":259,"description":9,"keywords":283,"body":284},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:5.Crossword.md","/content-creation/minigame/crossword",[108,109]," Crossword Challenge your audience with a themed crossword puzzle. Crosswords are great for educational content, themed challenges, and keeping audiences engaged with word-based puzzles. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Crossword . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Under Minigame , use the slider to determine the grid size of your crossword (5-15). Smaller grids are harder to fill than big ones. Click on Add word to add words to your grid. For each word, you need to specify the word, clue, and word direction. Added words will appear in the right sidebar. You can drag them into the grid. Any conflicting letters or word intersections will be marked in red. Empty cells will show as black fields in the finished crossword. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Answers Option Description Default Score The number of points awarded for completing the crossword. 1 Game settings Option Description Default Show success message Display a message to your audience once they finish the crossword. ON Show success message media Add an image or video to the success message. OFF Crossword settings Option Description Default Show rules to user Display a \"How to play\" overview explaining how to navigate crosswords. OFF Highlight current word Highlight the currently selected row or column while your audience is solving the crossword. ON Allow guess-checking Let your audience check whether their entered letters are correct. ON Allow auto-checking all letters Let your audience auto-check all entered letters at once. ON Allow answer-revealing Let your audience reveal the correct answer for a selected word. ON Highlighted word color The color used to highlight the currently selected row or column. Yellow Highlighted cell color The color used to highlight the currently selected cell. Light blue",{"id":286,"path":287,"dir":245,"title":260,"description":9,"keywords":288,"body":290},"content:1.Content creation:3.Minigame:6.Minesweeper.md","/content-creation/minigame/minesweeper",[108,109,289],"Scoring system"," Minesweeper Engage your audience with the classic Minesweeper puzzle game. This nostalgic game format is perfect for activating audiences who remember Minesweeper from years past, and it naturally increases time spent on your site. With multiple game modes and a scoring system, Minesweeper is ideal for leaderboard competitions and repeat engagement. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Minesweeper . Enter a title and description, and add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (all optional). Customize the game field by setting the number of Rows , Columns , and Mines . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Minesweeper settings Option Description Default Show rules to user Display a \"How to play\" overview explaining the rules of Minesweeper. ON Game Mode Choose a game mode. Normal Mode : Collects points and tracks high scores. Streak Mode : Adds a streak multiplier for consecutive wins. None : No score calculation for a pure gameplay experience. Streak Mode # Columns Set the number of columns for the game grid. 9 # Rows Set the number of rows for the game grid. 9 # Mines Set the number of mines hidden in the field. 10 Scoring system Minesweeper uses a comprehensive scoring system that rewards skill, speed, and efficiency: Base Score: 10 points per revealed safe cell Time Bonus: Up to 1,000 points for fast completion (exponentially decreasing) Efficiency Bonus: Up to 500 points for precise flagging (fewer unnecessary flags) Grid Size Multiplier: Larger fields give +50% per 100 cells Mine Density Multiplier: More mines = higher difficulty = up to +200% bonus Streak Multiplier: In Streak Mode, +10% per streak level for consecutive wins The scoring system encourages both speed and accuracy, making Minesweeper perfect for leaderboard competitions and repeat engagement.",{"id":292,"path":293,"dir":294,"title":295,"description":296,"keywords":297,"body":298},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:0.Create a personality quiz.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/create-a-personality-quiz","personality-quiz","Create a personality quiz","Engage and get to know your audience with personality-based outcomes. Each answer is scored against multiple personality outcomes, and the result with the highest total wins. You can also use attributes for secondary scoring dimensions. Two question block types are available: Single-select and Multi-select.",[85]," Create a personality quiz Engage and get to know your audience with personality-based outcomes. Each answer is scored against multiple personality outcomes, and the result with the highest total wins. You can also use attributes for secondary scoring dimensions. Two question block types are available: Single-select and Multi-select . Ideas: \"Which city should I live in?\", product finders (\"Which smartphone is right for me?\"), career assessments, team role identifiers, style quizzes. Get started In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Personality quiz , and click on Create Personality quiz from scratch . Under Personalities , complete the personality block with media, a result title, and a description. The Label is only for you, not for your audience. Click on ADD ANOTHER PERSONALITY and repeat the process for as many personalities as you like. If you want to add attributes, click on ADD AN ATTRIBUTE under Attributes , and complete the block with media, an attribute title, and a description. Attributes are characteristics or elements that can apply across all personalities. They provide a secondary level of insight and are completely independent of your personalities. For example, you have a \"What car should you buy?\" Riddle. Each personality is a different car and you have two attributes as extras such as \"baby seat\" and \"insurance\", which are all completely unrelated to the actual cars. Attributes are optional. Under Questions , add blocks by clicking on ADD A BLOCK and selecting a personality quiz block . Complete each block with media, a title, and answer content. Edit the scoring for each question by clicking on EDIT SCORING . Learn more about Scoring . Under Results , edit the result block(s). Read more in the Result blocks help guide . Publish your personality quiz. Embed your personality quiz.",{"id":300,"path":301,"dir":294,"title":302,"description":303,"keywords":304,"body":305},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:1.Personality quiz blocks.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/personality-quiz-blocks","Personality quiz blocks","There are two question blocks you can add to your personality quiz.",[93,94]," Personality quiz blocks There are two question blocks you can add to your personality quiz. Single-select Your audience picks one answer from a list of choices. Each answer is scored against your personalities. Learn more about the Single-select block Multi-select Your audience can pick more than one answer. Each answer is scored against your personalities. Learn more about the Multi-select block",{"id":307,"path":308,"dir":294,"title":93,"description":9,"keywords":309,"body":312},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:2.Single-select.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/single-select",[108,310,109,311],"Edit scoring","Change the order of answers"," Single-select Your audience picks one answer from a list of choices. Each answer is scored against your personality outcomes using the scoring matrix. The personality with the highest total score wins. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Single-select . Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers into the Answer content fields. Click on EDIT SCORING to open the scoring matrix and assign point values for each answer against each personality. Edit scoring Click on EDIT SCORING to open the scoring matrix dialog. The dialog has two tabs: PERSONALITIES and ATTRIBUTES (OPTIONAL) . Personalities tab: A matrix where rows are your answers and columns are your personalities. Enter a score value (default: 0) in each cell. The TOTALS row shows the sum per personality. The personality with the highest total score wins. Attributes tab: Same matrix structure, but columns are your attributes. Only visible if you have defined attributes. Learn more about Scoring . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. OFF Description Show a description field for each answer. OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack Change the order of answers Click and drag the six dots on the left of the answer field to move answers up or down. ",{"id":314,"path":315,"dir":294,"title":94,"description":9,"keywords":316,"body":317},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:3.Multi-select.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/multi-select",[108,310,109,311]," Multi-select Your audience can pick more than one answer from a list of choices. Each answer is scored against your personality outcomes using the scoring matrix. The personality with the highest total score wins. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Multi-select . Insert a question into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Insert the answers. Add as many answers as you want by clicking on Add an answer . Click on EDIT SCORING to open the scoring matrix and assign point values for each answer against each personality. Edit scoring Click on EDIT SCORING to open the scoring matrix dialog. The dialog has two tabs: PERSONALITIES and ATTRIBUTES (OPTIONAL) . Personalities tab: A matrix where rows are your answers and columns are your personalities. Enter a score value (default: 0) in each cell. The TOTALS row shows the sum per personality. The personality with the highest total score wins. Attributes tab: Same matrix structure, but columns are your attributes. Only visible if you have defined attributes. Learn more about Scoring . Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Media Option Description Default Show media Toggle to show or hide the block's main image. ON Media ratio Choose the aspect ratio: From settings, Wide 16:9, Square 1:1, Tall 3:4, or Original ratio. From settings Answers Option Description Default Show answer media Toggle to show or hide images on each answer choice. OFF Description Show a description field for each answer. OFF Shuffle answers Randomize the order of answers each time the block loads. OFF Unlimited choices Allow your audience to select an unlimited number of answers. ON Set how many items your audience can vote for by disabling Unlimited choices and typing or using the up and down arrows to change the number. Style Option Description Default Flexible height Allow answer boxes to have different heights based on their content. ON Layout Choose how answers are displayed: Stack (vertical list) or Row (horizontal grid). Stack Change the order of answers Click and drag the six dots on the left of the answer field to move answers up or down. ",{"id":319,"path":320,"dir":294,"title":321,"description":322,"keywords":323,"body":326},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:4.Scoring.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/scoring","Scoring","Riddle's personality quiz features two scoring calculation modes.",[324,325],"Assign points (weighting)","Score calculation methods"," Scoring Riddle's personality quiz features two scoring calculation modes. Your personality quiz can either be a 'projective test' or a 'self-report inventory' . Scoring is based on a subtle analysis of all of the Riddle taker's responses: Overall results (e.g. You're a collaborative manager!) Attributes (e.g. Responsibility = 65%, Decisiveness = 48%) Assign points (weighting) The personality quiz uses a weighted response system, with a range of points from 100 to -100 for each response option. You assign more points the stronger the association for that response. For example, you could have Paris and Tanzania as results in a 'What is your dream holiday getaway?' quiz. Imagine the question 'What do you do in your spare time?' had 'Hiking' and 'Fine dining' as answers. For people who answered 'Hiking', you could assign +20 points for 'Tanzania' and +5 points for 'Paris'. For people who answered 'Fine dining', you could assign +20 points for 'Paris' and +8 points for 'Tanzania'. You can do the same for each question in your personality quiz. After all the questions, our system adds up the points for all of the responses and gives the audience the particular personality / result with the most points, as well as a set of attributes. Click on a single-select or multi-select block. Click on EDIT SCORING to open the scoring matrix dialog. Use the up and down arrows to adjust the points. The scoring matrix dialog The Edit Scoring dialog shows a matrix where rows represent the answers for the current question and columns represent each personality. Each cell contains a number input (default: 0) that determines how many points that answer gives to that personality. The TOTALS row at the bottom shows the sum of points per personality for the current question. The personality with the highest total score across all questions becomes the winning result. You can switch the dialog to fullscreen for easier editing with many personalities. PERSONALITIES and ATTRIBUTES tabs: The dialog has two tabs: PERSONALITIES - assign points from each answer to each personality result. ATTRIBUTES (OPTIONAL) - assign points from each answer to each attribute. Attributes are secondary scores shown alongside the winning personality (e.g. \"Creativity: 75%, Logic: 42%\"). You can define attributes in the personality settings. Score calculation methods You can choose from two sorts of result calculations. Total points achieved across all personalities Total points are combined across all personalities. Your result is your points divided by this grand total. Go to the SETTINGS section. Go to Result calculation based on . Select Total points achieved across all personalities . Max points possible for each result Each personality has its own total. Your result for a personality is your points divided by that personality's total. Go to the SETTINGS section. Go to Result calculation based on . Select The max points possible for each personality .",{"id":328,"path":329,"dir":294,"title":330,"description":331,"keywords":332,"body":333},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:5.Create low-medium-high results.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/create-low-medium-high-results","Create low/medium/high results","If you are using our Show other results feature for the result page, your audience sees their top result and how they scored with the other possible results. For these other non-winning results, you can show different result variants to each Riddle taker, based on the percentage of points they scored for each result to give your audience a more personalized assessment.",[]," Create low/medium/high results If you are using our  Show other results  feature for the  result page , your audience sees their top result and how they scored with the other possible results. For these other non-winning results, you can show different result variants to each Riddle taker, based on the percentage of points they scored for each result to give your audience a more personalized assessment. In your Riddle, click on one of your Personalities . Click on the Options icon next to Winning result . Enable Create low/medium/high results . Under Score ranges , drag and drop the slider to where you would like to set your variant. Click on ADD RANGE and repeat step 4 for as many variants as you like. We recommend two or three variants. The result variants will appear under the Winning result . Add media, result title, and optional description. Repeat for as many personalities as you like. Go to the Result page section and delete the Winning personality element. Click on ADD and select Other personalities . Click on Edit and enable Include winning personality and change the layout to full width . ",{"id":335,"path":336,"dir":294,"title":337,"description":338,"keywords":339,"body":344},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:6.Custom CTAs for personality outcomes.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/custom-ctas-for-personality-outcomes","Custom CTAs for personality outcomes","You can now add a unique Call to Action (CTA) to every personality result in your Personality Quizzes - giving you a powerful new way to guide your audience after discovering their type.",[340,341,342,343],"How it works","Add a CTA to a personality result","Use cases","Best practices"," Custom CTAs for personality outcomes You can now add a unique Call to Action (CTA) to every personality result in your Personality Quizzes - giving you a powerful new way to guide your audience after discovering their type. How it works Each CTA appears directly below the personality description on the result page and can be fully customized: Add any label you like - Customize the button text to match your brand voice Link to any URL - Direct your audience to product pages, articles, sign-ups, other Riddle content, or anything else Optional per personality - Add CTAs only where they make sense, leaving other results without CTAs if preferred Add a CTA to a personality result Go to your personality quiz and go to the Results section. Select the personality result you want to add a CTA to. Scroll down to the Call to Action section. Enable Show CTA . Enter your Button label (the text that appears on the button). Enter the Link URL where you want your audience to be directed. Enable Open in new tab if you want the link to open in a new browser tab. Use cases Product recommendations: Direct your audience to products that match their personality type Content discovery: Link to articles, blog posts, or other Riddles relevant to their result Lead generation: Guide your audience to sign-up forms or email subscriptions E-commerce: Drive traffic to specific product categories based on personality insights Educational: Point your audience to courses, resources, or learning materials Best practices Keep it relevant: Make sure the CTA aligns with the personality result Be specific: Use clear, action-oriented button labels Test different CTAs: Try different approaches to see what resonates with your audience Don't overdo it: Only add CTAs where they add value – not every personality needs one",{"id":346,"path":347,"dir":294,"title":348,"description":349,"keywords":350,"body":360},"content:1.Content creation:4.Personality quiz:7.Make a compelling personality quiz.md","/content-creation/personality-quiz/make-a-compelling-personality-quiz","Make a compelling personality quiz","These steps are a breakdown of how we created the personality quiz 'What's your management style?'.",[351,352,353,354,355,356,357,358,359],"Step 1a: Create personalities","Step 1b: Add low / medium / high result variants (optional)","Step 2a: Add attributes (optional)","Step 2b: Add low / medium / high attribute variants (optional)","Step 3: Create questions","Step 4: Assign points / weighting for answers","Step 5: Branching logic","Step 6: Scoring calculation method","Step 7: Customize result page"," Make a compelling personality quiz These steps are a breakdown of how we created the personality quiz ' What's your management style? '. Step 1a: Create personalities You need to start at the end by creating personality results. These are the different overall outcomes your Riddle audience can have. Step 1b: Add low / medium / high result variants (optional) If you're using our Show other results feature for the result page , your audience sees their top result and how they scored with the other possible results. For these other non-winning results, you can show different result variants to each Riddle taker, based on the percentage of points they scored for each result. We created three variants for the 'Collaborative' result using the 'low / med / high' result feature, each with different text and images: 70-100%: Very collaborative 31-69%: Somewhat collaborative 0-30%: Not very collaborative Imagine someone in your audience got 'Authoritative' as their overall result, but also scored 58% with 'Collaborative'. They would see the medium result variant for the 'Collaborative' result: Title: \"You're somewhat collaborative\" Description: \"Your leadership style is somewhat democratic - you make an effort to gather feedback from each team member...\" Instead of one-size-fits-all results, you can use these low / med / high variants to present Riddle takers with a more personalized assessment. In our management example, someone in your audience might get: Winning result: 'Mentoring' as their main result Other result #1: 'Collaborative' 57% = show them the medium variant Other result #2: 'Authoritarian' 18% = include the low variant Step 2a: Add attributes (optional) Attributes are charactersitics or elements that can apply across all personalities. They provide a secondary level of insight and are completely independent of your personalities. Our 'What's your management style?' personality quiz has three possible personalities and four attributes: Personalities: Collaborative Authoritarian Mentoring Attibutes: Responsible Proactive Organized Decisive Step 2b: Add low / medium / high attribute variants (optional) Add low / medium / high variants for your personality attributes as well. This gives you added flexibility to present accurate results around each person's responses. If someone in your audience had a low score for the 'Organized' attribute in our management personality quiz , you could show them the 'low' attribute variant for 'Organized' that would more accurately describe them. Step 3: Create questions Craft your questions around the personalities. You can create either situational questions or direct questions: Situational questions - These questions put the quiz taker into a realistic scenario and prompt them to choose how they would react. They focus on behavior and decision making, helping uncover personality traits through actions rather than self description. Example: \"You're working on a group project and one person isn't contributing. What do you do?\" Direct questions - This approach asks quiz takers to think about their preferences, habits, or traits without introducing a scenario. It works well for identifying attitudes, motivations, and personal tendencies. Example: \"What motivates you most when working with others?\" Tip: Using a mix of situational and direct questions keeps your quiz engaging and improves the accuracy of your personality results. You can use single and multiple choice blocks in terms of assigning points to different results: Single choice - \"What's your approach towards mentoring your team?\" Multiple choice - \"Choose your two biggest strengths as a manager.\" Step 4: Assign points / weighting for answers For each answer in your personality quiz, add a score from 1 to 20 by typing or clicking the up / down arrows) if that answer applies to a result or attribute. 0: no association 1-7: weak association 8-14: medium association 15-20: strong association Each answer can have scores in more than one result. In our example, we felt that 'utilizing group brainstorming activities' had a: Very strong association to 'Collaborative' manager (20 points) Strong association to 'Mentoring' (15 points) No association for 'Authoritarian' managers (0 points) Use the same method to add scores for the attributes in your personality quiz. Give your results roughly equal numbers of possible points, and then to do the same with your attributes. This balancing out ensures your audience has an equal chance of getting the different personalities and attributes. Step 5: Branching logic You can use use 'Answer logic' to show personality quiz takers different questions based on their personality quiz responses. In our example, answering 'Entry-level' sends the audience to branch A, while 'Mid-career' or 'Senior-level' sends the audience to branch B. Branching logic works with all single-choice blocks. Multiple-choice blocks do not support logic because your audience could cause logic conflict by choosing answers from two branches at the same time. Step 6: Scoring calculation method You have two options: Total possible points achieved across all personalities (default) Max points possible for each personality Example: total points across all personalities Someone in your audience answered a three-question version of our 'What management style are you?' personality quiz and had the following scores: Q1 (points) Q2 (points) Total points for the result Collaborative 10 10 20 Authoritarian 5 5 10 Mentoring 0 0 0 Total scored: 30 points Using the 'Total points' scoring calculation, your audience would get the following ranking of personality quiz results: Collaborative: 20 / 30 points = 66% Authoritarian: 10 / 30 points = 33% Mentoring: 0 / 30 points = 0% Example: max points possible for each personality In this three-question quiz, your audience got the following points: Q1 (points) Q2 (points) Q3 (points) Total points for result Max points possible % points possible Collaborative 14 14 7 35 42 83% Authoritarian 6 6 11 23 33 70% Mentoring 2 2 9 13 27 48% Using the 'Max points possible for each personality', your audience would get these results: Collaborative: 35 / 42 possible 'Collaborative' points = 83% Authoritarian: 23 / 33 possible 'Authoritarian' points = 70% Mentoring: 13 / 27 possible 'Mentoring' points = 48% Step 7: Customize result page Select a way to display the top result format under Top result format . Enable or disable Show media . Choose a Media ratio . Step 7b: Add other blocks to results page You can also add other text, media, and buttons to the results. To edit any block, double-click on the block and click on the Edit icon. Enable or disable options to suit you, and add text where you like. ",{"id":362,"path":363,"dir":364,"title":365,"description":366,"keywords":367,"body":368},"content:1.Content creation:5.Predictor:0.Create a predictor.md","/content-creation/predictor/create-a-predictor","predictor","Create a predictor","Let your audience predict the final result or winner of upcoming events. Predictors are perfect for sports competitions, election forecasts, award show predictions, and fantasy leagues. Two block types are available: Guess the Score and Pick the Winner. Connect to a leaderboard for prediction competitions.",[85]," Create a predictor Let your audience predict the final result or winner of upcoming events. Predictors are perfect for sports competitions, election forecasts, award show predictions, and fantasy leagues. Two block types are available: Guess the Score and Pick the Winner . Connect to a leaderboard for prediction competitions. Ideas: Sports match predictions, election forecasts, award show predictions, fantasy leagues, prediction competitions. Get started In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Predictor , and click on Create Predictor from scratch . Click on ADD A BLOCK and select one of the Predictor blocks . Complete your predictor using any combination of the different predictor blocks. Under Results , edit the result block(s). Go to the Result blocks help guide . Publish your predictor. Embed your predictor.",{"id":370,"path":371,"dir":364,"title":372,"description":373,"keywords":374,"body":377},"content:1.Content creation:5.Predictor:1.Predictor blocks.md","/content-creation/predictor/predictor-blocks","Predictor blocks","There are two predictor blocks you can add to your predictor. You can combine multiple blocks in a single predictor.",[375,376],"Guess the Score","Pick the Winner"," Predictor blocks There are two predictor blocks you can add to your predictor. You can combine multiple blocks in a single predictor. Guess the Score Select two teams or names and let your audience predict the final score or numerical result. Learn more about the Guess the Score block Pick the Winner Ask a question and let your audience choose just one winner or option. Learn more about the Pick the Winner block",{"id":379,"path":380,"dir":364,"title":381,"description":9,"keywords":382,"body":385},"content:1.Content creation:5.Predictor:2.Guess the score.md","/content-creation/predictor/guess-the-score","Guess the score",[108,383,384,157],"Settings","Customize appearance"," Guess the score Your audience can guess a score before a game or event. Two teams or names are displayed side by side, and your audience enters their predicted score for each. This block is ideal for sports predictions, head-to-head competitions, and any scenario with a numerical outcome. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Guess the score . There is one Guess the Score block in the predictor by default. Type a question or text into the Title field. Add names to the Team 1 and Team 2 fields. Add an image or logo by clicking on ADD LOGO and then Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . The logo image should have a transparent background and be a .png or .svg. Settings The following settings are configured in the Settings section on the left under GENERAL . Change the score separator Select the score separator from the dropdown menu. Bring winner forward Enable Bring winner forward to make the audience's choice bigger and place it in the foreground. Fade loser Enable Fade loser to make the background of the audience's losing choice gray. Share buttons in block Enable Share buttons in block to show the share buttons you have set up in the result page directly in this block. Customize appearance Customize colors In the block, click on the edit icon in the top right of the card. Click on the circles above Background and Text and choose colors or enter color codes. Upload background image In the block, click on the camera icon in the top right of the card and then Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Most images work well as they are automatically centered. If you require precise control, make the background image 317 x 469 px. Related articles Pick the Winner block Configure results and scoring",{"id":387,"path":388,"dir":364,"title":389,"description":9,"keywords":390,"body":391},"content:1.Content creation:5.Predictor:3.Pick the winner.md","/content-creation/predictor/pick-the-winner","Pick the winner",[108,109,383,384,157]," Pick the winner Your audience can pick a winner out of two players, teams, or options. A \"CHOOSE\" button appears under each side, and your audience clicks to make their pick. This block is ideal for head-to-head matchups, \"who will win\" predictions, and binary choice scenarios. Setup Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Pick the winner . Type a question or text into the Title field. Add names to the Team 1 and Team 2 fields. Add an image or logo by clicking on ADD LOGO and then Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . The logo image should have a transparent background and be a .png or .svg. Options Click on the options icon on the right to configure the following settings. Answers Option Description Default \"Tie\" option Add a third \"Tie\" option so your audience can predict a draw. ON Settings The following settings are configured in the Settings section on the left under GENERAL . Change the separator Select the separator from the dropdown menu. Bring winner forward Enable Bring winner forward to make the audience's choice bigger and place it in the foreground. Fade loser Enable Fade loser to make the background of the audience's losing choice gray. Share buttons in block Enable Share buttons in block to show the share buttons you have set up in the result page directly in this block. Customize appearance Customize colors In the block, click on the edit icon in the top right of the card. Click on the circles above Background and Text and choose colors or enter color codes. Upload background image In the block, click on the camera icon in the top right of the card and then Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Most images work well as they are automatically centered. If you require precise control, make the background image 317 x 469 px. Related articles Guess the Score block Configure results and scoring",{"id":393,"path":394,"dir":364,"title":395,"description":396,"keywords":397,"body":399},"content:1.Content creation:5.Predictor:4.Configure results and scoring.md","/content-creation/predictor/configure-results-and-scoring","Configure results and scoring","You can enter the correct results/outcome and configure scoring based on these outcomes.",[398],"A predictor connected to a leaderboard"," Configure results and scoring You can enter the correct results/outcome and configure scoring based on these outcomes. In your Predictor, go to Publish and click on Enter correct results . Enter the correct results using the up/down arrows or enter numbers in the fields under any block. You can also just enter a result for some blocks if any result is still in the future. Go to the Create section and click on CONFIGURE RESULTS Use the up/down arrows or enter your chosen score into the field under each of the four outcomes. The four outcomes to set points for are: EXACT PREDICTION = your audience guessed exactly the right score for a Guess the score block RIGHT DIFFRENCE PREDICTED = your audience a) chose the correct winning team and b) guessed the correct difference between the winning and losing score for a Guess the score block RIGHT TENDENCY = your audience chose the right winning team for a Guess the score block WRONG = your audience guessed the wrong score and the wrong winning team Republish your Riddle. Republish your Leaderboard (if you have a leaderboard connected to this Riddle). A predictor connected to a leaderboard If your score predictor is connected to a leaderboard and your lead download shows entries with (n/a), they were entered into your download for one of the following reasons: a) Someone filled out the predictor once and then clicked through the predictor again, entering the same nickname and email into the lead form. You will find their email twice in the download, but the second entry will not show any predictions, as only the first take of the predictor counts. b) If you have multiple predictions in the same Riddle and entered the correct score for only some of them, then your audience cannot make a prediction for the entries where a score is already entered. They will therefore be shown the final result whilst you will see (n/a) for the respective card in the lead download.",{"id":401,"path":402,"dir":403,"title":404,"description":405,"keywords":406,"body":411},"content:1.Content creation:6.Leaderboard:0.Create a leaderboard.md","/content-creation/leaderboard/create-a-leaderboard","leaderboard","Create a leaderboard","You can create a leaderboard for any Riddle you have created. You can create a leaderboard as a Riddle in its own right, or you can add a leaderboard to the result page.",[407,408,409,410],"Leaderboard setup","Change the podium colors","Security and privacy settings","Ideas and extra information"," Create a leaderboard You can create a leaderboard for any Riddle you have created. You can create a leaderboard as a Riddle in its own right, or you can add a leaderboard to the result page . Leaderboard setup Create a Riddle and publish it. Note: While you can collect names and emails for leaderboard entries, they are no longer required. You can create arcade-style leaderboards where your audience only needs to enter a nickname. In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Leaderboard , and click on Create Leaderboard from scratch . Enter or edit the title in the Enter your title field. Click on Connect your Riddles here and then CONNECT RIDDLES . Choose a Riddle from the list, using the searchbar if needed, and click on the plus icon. Click on SAVE & CLOSE to finish the setup, or SAVE & CONNECT MORE and repeat step six. Essential, Pro, and Business plan users can connect one Riddle to a leaderboard. Enterprise plan users can connect an unlimited number of Riddles. Click on the minus icon to remove a connected Riddle. In the pop-up that appears, click on DELETE to confirm that all associated scores will be removed from the leaderboards. Publish your leaderboard. Embed your leaderboard. Change the podium colors Click on the circles on the right of the top three places in the leaderboard. Select a color or insert a HEX code and click on APPLY . The default colors are gold for first place, silver for second, bronze for third. Security and privacy settings You can customize how your audience participates in your leaderboard: Disable 2FA verification For new leaderboards, 2FA (two-factor authentication) is disabled by default, as we found your audience typically uses leaderboards for fun and engagement rather than serious competitions where 2FA is necessary. Go to the Settings section and click on Leaderboard: Security / Privacy . Disable Require OTP verification to allow your audience to participate without email confirmation. Remove email requirement Create an arcade-style leaderboard where your audience only needs to enter a nickname: Go to the Settings section and click on Leaderboard: Security / Privacy . Disable Require email to remove the email mapping. Your audience can now participate with just a nickname, and emails won't be required or displayed. Ideas and extra information Create weekly, monthly, or even ongoing cumulative leaderboards that connect different Riddles and motivate your audience to keep playing. A person's highest score is always the one that's counted on the leaderboard. If someone gets 50 points the first time they play, for example, and then 70 points the second time, the 70 will be on the leaderboard, not 50. You can play a quiz or predictor multiple times. Only your best result appears on the leaderboard. Related articles: Configure scoring Customize the display Analyze a leaderboard",{"id":413,"path":414,"dir":403,"title":415,"description":416,"keywords":417,"body":419},"content:1.Content creation:6.Leaderboard:1.Configure scoring.md","/content-creation/leaderboard/configure-scoring","Configure scoring","You can adjust how your audience's scores are calculated for the leaderboard, using our integrated quiz time multiplier.",[418],"How scoring works"," Configure scoring You can adjust how your audience's scores are calculated for the leaderboard, using our integrated quiz time multiplier. How scoring works Each question has a fixed point value (defined by the Creator). Your total score is calculated from all answered questions. The score is multiplied by a time factor – the faster you complete the quiz, the higher your final score. You can play a quiz multiple times. Only your best result appears on the leaderboard. Quiz scoring For quizzes, the time multiplier uses a formula to calculate points by combining your audience's score with the time taken to answer the quiz questions (in seconds). Go to the Settings section and click on Leaderboard: Scoring . Under Quiz time multiplier , adjust the number on the slider. The time multiplier ranges from 0 to 100x and the default multiplier is 100. The formula is: Points = points x ( 1 + ( 1 / ( time taken (in seconds) )) x multiplier ) The higher the multiplier, the more you will be rewarded for a faster time-taken and the more variation you will have between entries on the leaderboard. This can also increase audience motivation to be high up on the leaderboard. Here is an example calculation: Points = 6 Time taken (in seconds) = 60.057 Multiplier = 100 6 x (1 + (1 / 60.057) x 100) = 16 Predictor scoring For predictors, points are awarded only after the final result is submitted. Point allocation can be individually adjusted by the Creator. For scoring calculation, your first submitted prediction counts. There is no time factor for predictors.",{"id":421,"path":422,"dir":403,"title":423,"description":424,"keywords":425,"body":426},"content:1.Content creation:6.Leaderboard:2. Customize the display.md","/content-creation/leaderboard/customize-the-display","Customize the display","You can set up what your leaderboard looks like.",[]," Customize the display You can set up what your leaderboard looks like. Go to the Settings section and click on Leaderboard: Display . Enable Compact view to show the top three places as rows. Disable Compact view to show the top three places as a winning podium. Enable Share button to allow the audience to share a link to the Riddle and emojis with others. Disable Share button to hide the button. Use the up / down arrows or enter a number into the Number of results above entry and Number of results below entry fields. ",{"id":428,"path":429,"dir":403,"title":430,"description":431,"keywords":432,"body":434},"content:1.Content creation:6.Leaderboard:3.Analyze a leaderboard.md","/content-creation/leaderboard/analyze-a-leaderboard","Leads and entries","In addition to other analytics, you can look at and download your lead / entry statistics for any leaderboard.",[433],"Download leads"," Leads and entries In addition to other analytics, you can look at and download your lead / entry statistics for any leaderboard. In your leaderboard Riddle, click on the Analyze tab, and then click on Leads/Entries . You will see all the entries for the leaderboard as a scrollable table, with entries appearing in placement order, sorted by: placement nickname email address number of points Write a name in the Search field and click on the magnifiying glass icon or press Enter to find a specific entry and view only this entry. Download leads You can download all leaderboard entries in one file for easy analysis and lead management. In your leaderboard Riddle, click on the Analyze tab, and then click on Leads/Entries . Click on Download Leads . Two export formats are available: Clean export: Contains only name and email fields Perfect for simple lead lists and email marketing Detailed export: Includes all audience data Contains a detailed breakdown of how each person's score is calculated Shows individual question scores, time taken, and other scoring details Ideal for deeper analysis and understanding audience performance Select your preferred export format and click on Download . The file will be downloaded as a CSV file that you can open in Excel, Google Sheets, or any spreadsheet application. For other analytics, go to the Analyze help guides .",{"id":436,"path":437,"dir":438,"title":439,"description":440,"keywords":441,"body":444},"content:1.Content creation:7. Story:0.Create a story.md","/content-creation/story/create-a-story","story","Create a story","Create interactive stories, listicles, and journeys using text, images, videos, or social media posts. Each block becomes one page in a swipeable format.",[442,443],"When to use a story","Story setup"," Create a story Create interactive stories, listicles, and journeys using text, images, videos, or social media posts. Each block becomes one page in a swipeable format. When to use a story Listicles and rankings - \"The 10 best coffee shops in Berlin\" Behind-the-scenes features - Take your audience through a process step by step Product showcases - Highlight features or use cases one at a time News recaps - Break down complex topics into digestible pages Then vs. now - Show transformations or historical timelines Story setup In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Story , and click on Create Story from scratch . You can also select Create Story from template to start with a pre-built story. Click on ADD A BLOCK and select one of the available story content blocks . Complete your story by adding multiple blocks. You can also add form blocks, personal details, text input, and monetization blocks. Under Results , edit the result block(s). Go to the Result blocks help guide . Publish your story. Embed your story.",{"id":446,"path":447,"dir":438,"title":448,"description":449,"keywords":450,"body":454},"content:1.Content creation:7. Story:1.Story content blocks.md","/content-creation/story/story-content-blocks","Story content blocks","Stories have two dedicated content blocks designed for page-by-page storytelling. You can also add form blocks and other shared blocks to collect data within your story.",[451,452,453],"Story-specific blocks","Form and data collection blocks","Monetization"," Story content blocks Stories have two dedicated content blocks designed for page-by-page storytelling. You can also add form blocks and other shared blocks to collect data within your story. Story-specific blocks Text / Media The main building block for stories. Each Text / Media block becomes one page in your story. Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Text / Media under Story prompts . Enter a headline in the Title field and optional text in the Description field. Add an image, GIF, or video/audio file by clicking on the media upload area. Options for Text / Media blocks: Show media - enable or disable the media display Media ratio - choose from Wide (16:9), Square (1:1), Tall (3:4), or use the default from settings Use Text / Media blocks for individual story pages like list items, product features, step-by-step instructions, or any content that benefits from a visual paired with text. Quote Add visually distinct quotations, testimonials, or key statistics to your story. Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Quote under Story prompts . Fill in the quote text and author name in the Content section. Add a background image by clicking on the media upload area in the Content section. Customize the background and text colors by clicking on the Options icon and selecting colors under Quote . Optionally add a Title and additional media above the quote. Use Quote blocks for expert testimonials, impactful statistics, key takeaways, or any statement you want to stand out visually from regular story pages. Form and data collection blocks You can add form blocks anywhere in your story to collect information from your audience. These work the same way as in other Riddle types. For detailed instructions on each form block, see the Forms help guide . Available form-related blocks in stories: Category Blocks Forms Make a form, Insert a form Personal details Name, Email, Phone, URL, Country selector, Data & Tracking consent Text input Short text, Long text, Number Other form blocks Dropdown, Radio button, Checkbox, Rating Time Date picker, Time picker Monetization You can insert an Ad / iFrame block between story pages to display ads or embed external content. See the Monetization blocks guide for details.",{"id":456,"path":457,"dir":458,"title":459,"description":460,"keywords":461,"body":462},"content:1.Content creation:8.Form:0.Create a form.md","/content-creation/form/create-a-form","form","Create a form","Collect emails, names, and other information from your audience using a standalone form.",[]," Create a form Collect emails, names, and other information from your audience using a standalone form. In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE , select Form , and click on Create Form from scratch . You can also select Create Form from template to start with a pre-built form. Click on ADD A BLOCK and select one of the available form content blocks . Complete your form creation using any combination of form blocks. You can also customize form fields . Under Results, edit the result block(s). Go to the Result blocks help guide . Publish your form. Embed your form. ",{"id":464,"path":465,"dir":458,"title":466,"description":467,"keywords":468,"body":487},"content:1.Content creation:8.Form:1.Form content blocks.md","/content-creation/form/form-content-blocks","Form content blocks","Within a Make a form block in your Riddle, there are 18 different form blocks to use.",[469,470,471,472,473,474,475,476,477,478,479,480,481,482,483,484,485,486],"Name","Email","Phone","URL","Dropdown","Radio button","Checkbox","Date picker","Time picker","Rating","Country selector","Short text","Long text","Number","Data & Tracking consent","Rich text","Add media","CAPTCHA"," Form content blocks Within a Make a form block in your Riddle, there are 18 different form blocks to use. Name Add a Name block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Email Add an Email block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Phone Add a Phone block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . URL Add a URL block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Dropdown Add a Dropdown block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Radio button Add a Radio button block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Checkbox Add a Checkbox block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Date picker Add a Date picker block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Time picker Add a Time picker block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Rating Add a Rating block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Country selector Add a Country selector block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Short text Add a Short text block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Long text Add a Long text block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Number Add a Number block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Data & Tracking consent Add a Data & Tracking consent block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Rich text Add a Rich text block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . Add media Add an Add media block. Click on the edit icon to make changes to this form block and click on SAVE . CAPTCHA Add a CAPTCHA block. Click on the edit icon to configure your CAPTCHA and click on SAVE . Select a CAPTCHA type. ",{"id":489,"path":490,"dir":458,"title":491,"description":492,"keywords":493,"body":500},"content:1.Content creation:8.Form:2.Customize form fields.md","/content-creation/form/customize-form-fields","Customize form fields","You can edit and customize form fields within a form or any other Riddle type.",[494,495,496,497,498,499],"Create columns","Enable description","Input pre-filled text","Make a field hidden","Make a field required","Set up advanced validation"," Customize form fields You can edit and customize form fields within a form or any other Riddle type. Create columns Form fields are formatted in rows by default. To create columns, click on ADD COLUMN BLOCK and select a column ratio. You can then move the block by clicking on the six dots above the block name, and then dragging and dropping it to any Drop spot. To move, copy, or delete a group of columns, click on the three dots under the column group and select an option. Enable description Click on the edit icon on the right of any form field to select options. Enable Description to add a text under the form field title. Input pre-filled text Click on the edit icon on the right of a form field. Enable Pre-filled text to add a text which is in the field form by default. Make a field hidden Click on the edit icon on the right of a form field. Enable Hidden field to hide this field from your audience. You can prefill this field with any data you like without your audience seeing it. Make a field required Click on the edit icon on the right of a form field. Enable Required field to make the field required. Set up advanced validation Click on the edit icon on the right of a form field. Enable Advanced validation options to set up extra rules for form filling. ",{"id":502,"path":503,"dir":504,"title":505,"description":506,"keywords":507,"body":512},"content:1.Content creation:9.Question Bank:0.Create a Question Bank for quizzes.md","/content-creation/question-bank/create-a-question-bank-for-quizzes","question-bank","Create a Question Bank for quizzes","A Question Bank is a database of text-based questions that allows you to display a random assortment of content to your audience based on specific parameters you set. This feature is ideal for creators who want to keep their audience engaged with fresh content daily without needing the bandwidth to manually create new quizzes every time.",[508,509,510,511],"Step 1: Choose Your Creation Method","Step 2: Generate Content with AI","Step 3: Upload and Edit Your Bank","Next Steps"," Create a Question Bank for quizzes A Question Bank is a database of text-based questions that allows you to display a random assortment of content to your audience based on specific parameters you set. This feature is ideal for creators who want to keep their audience engaged with fresh content daily without needing the bandwidth to manually create new quizzes every time. To create a Question Bank, go to the Question Bank section in the Riddle Creator and click on Create Question Bank . Step 1: Choose Your Creation Method There are two primary ways to add questions to your bank: Manual Entry (The Slowest Way): You can manually enter categories, difficulty ratings (1–10), titles, correct/wrong answers, and explanations for each question. Bulk Upload (The Best Way): For large datasets, it is highly recommended to upload a CSV file or use an AI prompt template to generate hundreds of questions at once. Step 2: Generate Content with AI Using an AI tool like Gemini can help you build a massive dataset quickly. Use Variables: When prompting the AI, specify the quantity (e.g., 50 questions), the topic (e.g., Asian Geography), and the language. Keep Types Separate: It is critical to keep different question types separate; for example, single-select questions must be managed differently than multi-select or \"order it\" questions. Step 3: Upload and Edit Your Bank Once you have your data ready, follow these steps to import it: Upload the File: Select your CSV file (e.g., \"quiz output with explanations\") and click on import. Editorial Control: After importing, you can view, edit, or delete questions and answers to maintain full editorial control. You can also add explanations for each question. Add Multiple Types: You can add different blocks to the same bank, such as a set of single-select general knowledge questions and a set of multi-select science questions. Publish: You must click on publish so the system knows the question bank is live and ready for use. Next Steps Once your Question Bank is created and published, you can configure it in your quiz and use the Question Bank block to display questions dynamically.",{"id":514,"path":515,"dir":504,"title":516,"description":517,"keywords":518,"body":522},"content:1.Content creation:9.Question Bank:1.Create a Question Bank for polls and surveys.md","/content-creation/question-bank/create-a-question-bank-for-polls-and-surveys","Create a Question Bank for polls and surveys","A Question Bank is a database of text-based questions that lets you automatically show a random assortment of content to your audience. For polls and surveys, it's a great way to collect feedback across a wide range of topics without needing to manually create new content every day.",[508,519,520,521,511],"Step 2: Use AI to Generate Questions","Step 3: Organize and Import Data","Step 4: Publish the Bank"," Create a Question Bank for polls and surveys A Question Bank is a database of text-based questions that lets you automatically show a random assortment of content to your audience. For polls and surveys, it's a great way to collect feedback across a wide range of topics without needing to manually create new content every day. To create a Question Bank, go to the Question Bank section in the Riddle Creator and click on Create Question Bank . Step 1: Choose Your Creation Method There are two primary ways to build your bank: Manual Entry: Add questions one by one, including category, difficulty rating, title, and answer options. This works well for smaller sets but is the slowest way to build a large bank. Bulk Upload (Recommended): Upload a file if you already have a database. This is the fastest way to add hundreds or thousands of questions at once. Step 2: Use AI to Generate Questions An AI prompt template can help you generate a large, high-quality dataset quickly. When prompting an AI tool (like Gemini), include these variables: Quantity: Specify the number of questions you want (for example, 50). Type: Indicate whether questions should be single-select or multi-select. Topic: Define the theme (for example, \"Asian Geography\" or \"Scientific Method\"). Language: Specify the language you want the questions written in. Step 3: Organize and Import Data To keep your bank working smoothly, follow these rules: Keep Types Separate: Store each question type in its own dataset. For example, single-select questions should not be mixed with multi-select questions. Upload Your File: Import your prepared CSV file into the Riddle system. Review and Edit: After upload, you have full editorial control to review, edit, or delete questions before they're shown to your audience. Step 4: Publish the Bank This step is required: click on Publish on your question bank so the system recognizes it as live and available for use. Next Steps Once your Question Bank is created and published, you can configure it in your poll or survey and use the Question Bank block to display questions dynamically.",{"id":524,"path":525,"dir":526,"title":527,"description":528,"keywords":529,"body":578},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:0.All Riddle blocks.md","/content-creation/blocks/all-riddle-blocks","blocks","All Riddle blocks","There are 48 different Riddle blocks to mix and match in your Riddles.",[530,531,532,533,534,535,536,537,538,539,540,541,542,543,544,545,546,547,548,549,550,551,552,553,554,555,556,557,558,559,560,561,562,563,564,565,566,567,568,569,570,571,572,573,574,575,576,577],"1. Single-select","2. Multi-select","3. Tap and find","4. Order it","5. Type the answer","6. Spot the difference","7. Flashcard","8. Typerush","9. Guess it","10. Question Bank","11. Swiper","12. Guess the score","13. Pick the winner","14. Slot machine","15. Wheel of fortune","16. Sudoku","17. Crossword","18. Minesweeper","19. Tier List","20. This or That","21. Reaction poll","22. Upvote","23. Promoter Score","24. Rate it","25. Likert / Matrix","26. Ad/iFrame","27. Make a form","28. Insert a form","29. Name","30. Email","31. Phone","32. URL","33. Country selector","34. Data and tracking consent","35. Date picker","36. Time picker","37. Short text","38. Long text","39. Number","40. Text/Media","41. Quote","42. Dropdown menu","43. Radio button","44. Checkbox","45. Rating","46. CAPTCHA","47. Result page","48. Redirect to URL"," All Riddle blocks There are 48 different Riddle blocks to mix and match in your Riddles. 1. Single-select Ask a question and let your audience select just one answer. 2. Multi-select Ask a question and let your audience select one or more answers. 3. Tap and find Upload an image and select a hotspot for your audience to find. 4. Order it Let your audience place the items in the right order. 5. Type the answer Ask your audience a right/wrong question and let your audience guess and type the right answer. 6. Spot the difference Upload two variations of the same image and ask your audience to find the differences between the two images. 7. Flashcard Encourage self-directed learning with interactive flashcards. 8. Typerush Ask a categorical question and let your audience type as many answers as they can. 9. Guess it Your audience guesses a person, place, or thing from a blurred image and clues. 10. Question Bank Automatically show a random selection of questions from a pre-built database. 11. Swiper Create a stack of options to let your audience quickly decide whether or not they like them or not by swiping left or right. 12. Guess the score Select two teams or names and let your audience predict the final score or numerical result. 13. Pick the winner Ask a question and let your audience choose just one winner or other option. 14. Slot machine Add an exciting and fun slot machine. 15. Wheel of fortune Spin the wheel for random prizes or surprises. 16. Sudoku Engage your audience with a logic-based, number-placement puzzle. 17. Crossword Challenge your audience with a themed crossword. 18. Minesweeper Engage your audience with the classic Minesweeper puzzle game. Customize the grid size, number of mines, and choose between Normal, Streak, or No-score game modes. 19. Tier List Let your audience rank items into customizable tiers (S, A, B, C, D, F) by dragging and dropping. Perfect for ranking products, preferences, or priorities. 20. This or That Create a tournament-style voting experience where your audience chooses between two options at a time until one wins. Ideal for \"Would you rather\" style content or product comparisons. 21. Reaction poll Collect audience feedback using a slider ranging from strongly disagree to strongly agree. 22. Upvote A poll combined with a list where your audience can upvote their favorite entries and watch the list reorder by popularity. 23. Promoter Score Ask your audience how likely they are to recommend your product or service using a 0-10 NPS scale. 24. Rate it Gather quick feedback on multiple items using stars or score ratings. 25. Likert / Matrix Create a series of closed-ended statements or questions with scaled response options. 26. Ad/iFrame Place your own video or image ad inside your Riddle. These can either be inserted manually or displayed from your ad server. 27. Make a form Create a new form to collect information from your audience. 28. Insert a form Reuse an existing form you've saved. 29. Name Ask your audience for their name so you can personalize their experience. 30. Email Ask your audience for their email so you can send them messages. 31. Phone Ask your audience for their phone number. 32. URL Ask your audience for their company's website. 33. Country selector Ask your audience to select the country they live in from a dropdown menu. 34. Data and tracking consent Enables consent for linking given answers and personal data, as well as for tracking. 35. Date picker Allow your audience to choose a date. 36. Time picker Allow your audience to pick a time. 37. Short text Allow your audience to input short text of 15 words or fewer. 38. Long text Allow your audience to input long text of 15 words or more. 39. Number Allow your audience to input a number. 40. Text/Media Display text and media without the need for audience input. 41. Quote Insert a quote and a background image. 42. Dropdown menu Allow your audience to pick an option from a dropdown list you create. 43. Radio button Display a series of options that allows your audience to select just one option. 44. Checkbox Display a checkbox for terms and conditions or privacy policies which your audience can click to accept. 45. Rating Ask your audience to give their rating in stars for your product or service. 46. CAPTCHA Add your Google ReCAPTCHA or Cloudflare Turnstile CAPTCHA, or use the Riddle puzzle CAPTCHA. 47. Result page Build one or more result pages using the drag and drop builder to display result elements such as score and media to your audience based on their result. 48. Redirect to URL Send your audience to a different page or URL at the end of their Riddle based on their overall results. ",{"id":580,"path":581,"dir":526,"title":582,"description":583,"keywords":584,"body":585},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:1.Prompts.md","/content-creation/blocks/prompts","Prompts","Each sort of Riddle has its own prompts to use as building blocks for your Riddle. You can then add, mix and match, and customize any other blocks into your Riddle.",[]," Prompts Each sort of Riddle has its own prompts to use as building blocks for your Riddle. You can then add, mix and match, and customize any other blocks into your Riddle. Quiz blocks Poll/survey blocks Personality quiz blocks Form prompts Predictor blocks Minigame blocks",{"id":587,"path":588,"dir":526,"title":453,"description":589,"keywords":590,"body":592},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:2.Monetization.md","/content-creation/blocks/monetization","You can monetize the high engagement of your Riddles by inserting your own video or banner interstitial ads, along with any other content, using our flexible ad blocks. You can combine the ad block into any Riddle.",[591,109],"1. Ad"," Monetization You can monetize the high engagement of your Riddles by inserting your own video or banner interstitial ads, along with any other content, using our flexible ad blocks. You can combine the ad block into any Riddle. 1. Ad Insert your own ads in your Riddles, a powerful way to monetize your quizzes. Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Ad block. Insert a text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Enable Project ad and select an ad slot if you want to use a project ad slot. Set up a project ad if necessary. OR Add a URL and height to the Ad content section fields. Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio . SKIP: Go to the options icon on the right of Answer Content and enable Skip ad button . Add a time delay by enabling Delay skip button and type in the delay you would like.",{"id":594,"path":595,"dir":526,"title":596,"description":597,"keywords":598,"body":601},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:3.Forms.md","/content-creation/blocks/forms","Forms","You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle.",[599,600,109],"1. Make a form","2. Insert a form"," Forms You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle. 1. Make a form You can create an all-in-one form with Riddle to collect all of the information in one place. Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Make a form . Insert your text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Name and Email fields are in the form by default. To add other form blocks, click on ADD FORM BLOCK and select as many form blocks as you like. There are 18 different form blocks to use in your form . Form fields are formatted in rows by default. To create columns, click on ADD COLUMN BLOCK and select a column ratio. You can then move the block by clicking on the six dots above the block name, and then dragging and dropping it to any Drop spot. To move, copy, or delete a group of columns, click on the three dots under the column group and select an option. Click on the edit icon on the right of any form field to select options. Select one or more of the following options: Enable Description to add a text under the form field title. Enable Pre-filled text to add a text which is in the field form by default. Enable Hidden field to hide this field from your audience. You can prefill this field with any data you like without your audience seeing it. Enable Required field to make the field required. Enable Advanced validation options to set up extra rules for form filling. 2. Insert a form Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Insert a form . Insert your text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Go to the Form content section and select a form to insert from the dropdown list under Embed form . You can now see the form you select below. Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio . SKIP: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Enable Disable skip button to make the block required and to remove the skip button.",{"id":603,"path":604,"dir":526,"title":605,"description":597,"keywords":606,"body":613},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:4.Personal details.md","/content-creation/blocks/personal-details","Personal details",[607,608,609,610,611,612,109],"1. Name","2. Email","3. Phone","4. Website URL","5. Country selector","6. Data and tracking consent"," Personal details You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle. 1. Name Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Name. Type your question or title, such as \"What's your first name?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add a Label and Field instructions (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 2. Email Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Email. Type your question or title, such as \"How should we contact you?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add a Label and Field instructions (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 3. Phone Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Phone. Type your question or title, such as \"If you prefer to be contacted by phone, give us your phone number.\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add a Label and Field instructions (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 4. Website URL Click on ADD A BLOCK and select URL. Type your question or title, such as \"What's your company's website?\" or \"What website did you find us on?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add a Label and Field instructions (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). Any URL will need to follow this structure: https:// + site name.@, into the field. 5. Country selector Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Country selector. Type a question, such as \"Where do you live?\", into the Title field. Your audience can then select a country from the prefilled dropdown list. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add a Label and Field instructions (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 6. Data and tracking consent Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Data & Tracking consent. By default, this block contains a checkbox for your audience to grant consent to combining answers with form data. You can therefore leave this block as it is, or make additions or changes as described below. Add a Title and/or image, GIF, or video/audio file . The Consent checkbox to allow the audience's Riddle responses to be included with their form data is enabled and filled out for you by default. Disable Consent checkbox if you don't need this. Edit the Label , Description , and Checkbox text as required. Enable Consent checkbox for tracking to ask your audience to give their consent to their custom trackers being used in this Riddle. Edit the Label , Description , and Checkbox text as required. You could add links to your privacy policy or terms and conditions for audience's ease of reference. Click on the Options icon next to Form content to enable Display Riddle's privacy message . Click on the Options icon next to Form content to enable Show lead ID . Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio . ADD A DESCRIPTION: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Form options , enable Description . You can now add extra information or guidance for your audience in the Description field under Form content . Some blocks already have a description field by default. PREFILLED TEXT: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Form options , enable Enable prefilled text . You can now click on the % icon in the Prefilled (default) text field under Form content and select a parameter from the dropdown menu. This pre-exisitng user data from your site will now be prefilled into the block, saving time and increasing conversions. MAKE BLOCK COMPULSORY: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Enable Disable skip button to make the block required and to remove the skip button. SET UP ADVANCED VALIDATION OPTIONS: Click on the Options icon, enable Advanced validation options and enter your regular expression without the leading \"/\" and without the trailing \"/igm\". You can now ensure entries follow a certain format, such as having a certain number of digits for phone numbers and/or having a certain starting number or letter.",{"id":615,"path":616,"dir":526,"title":617,"description":597,"keywords":618,"body":621},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:5.Other content blocks.md","/content-creation/blocks/other-content-blocks","Other content blocks",[619,620,109],"1. Text / media","2. Quote"," Other content blocks You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle. 1. Text / media You can create a text / media block to inform or entertain your audience without a question. Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Text / media . Insert your text into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . 2. Quote You can enter important quotations or statistical data. Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Quote. Add an image, quote text, and the author in the Content section fields. Customize the background and text colors by clicking on the Options icon on the right of Content and selecting colors from the dropdown menus under Quote . Add text into the Title field (optional). Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (optional). Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio .",{"id":623,"path":624,"dir":526,"title":625,"description":597,"keywords":626,"body":631},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:6.Other form blocks.md","/content-creation/blocks/other-form-blocks","Other form blocks",[627,628,629,630,109],"1. Dropdown","2. Radio button","3. Checkbox","4. Rating"," Other form blocks You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle. 1. Dropdown Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Dropdown . Type a question such as \"How big is your company?\" into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Enter options such as 1-5, 6-20, 21-50, 51+ into the Field answer options , clicking on ADD AN ANSWER for as many new options as you need. Add a Label and Field instructions (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 2. Radio button Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Radio button . Type your question or title, such as \"Where did you hear about us?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add the answer options into the Field answer options fields, clicking on ADD AN ANSWER for as many new options as you need. Add a Label (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 3. Checkbox Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Checkbox. Type a question such as \"Do you agree with our Ts and Cs?\" into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Type a text, such as \"Yes, I agree\", into the Checkbox text field. You could add links to your privacy policy or terms and conditions for ease of reference for your audience. Add a Label (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). 4. Rating Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Name. Type a question, such as \"How would you rate our customer service?\", into the Title box. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . The default number of stars is 5. To change this, type a number in the Amount of stars field. Your audience can then give their rating in whole-star or half-star increments. Add a Label (optional if you want to give your audience more guidance). Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio . ADD A DESCRIPTION: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Form options , enable Description . You can now add extra information or guidance for your audience in the Description field under Form content . Some blocks already have a description field by default. MAKE BLOCK COMPULSORY: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Enable Disable skip button to make the block required and to remove the skip button.",{"id":633,"path":634,"dir":526,"title":635,"description":597,"keywords":636,"body":640},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:7.Text input.md","/content-creation/blocks/text-input","Text input",[637,638,639,109],"1. Short text","2. Long text","3. Number"," Text input You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle. 1. Short text Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Short text. Type your question, such as \"What is your job title?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add information into the Label and Field instructions (optional). 2. Long text Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Long text. Type your question, such as \"What are your main tasks in your job?\" into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add information into the Label and Field instructions (optional). 3. Number Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Number. Type your question, such as \"What's your annual budget?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file . Add information into the Label and Field instructions (optional). Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio . ADD A DESCRIPTION: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Form options , enable Description . You can now add extra information or guidance for your audience in the Description field under Form content . Some blocks already have a description field by default. PREFILLED TEXT: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Form options , enable Enable prefilled text . You can now click on the % icon in the Prefilled (default) text field under Form content and select a parameter from the dropdown menu. This pre-exisitng user data from your site will now be prefilled into the block, saving time and increasing conversions. MAKE BLOCK COMPULSORY: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Enable Disable skip button to make the block required and to remove the skip button.",{"id":642,"path":643,"dir":526,"title":102,"description":644,"keywords":645,"body":649},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:8.Question Bank.md","/content-creation/blocks/question-bank","The Question Bank block allows you to display questions dynamically from a pre-built Question Bank database. This block is perfect for keeping your content fresh and engaging without manually creating new questions every time.",[646,647,648],"How to Use the Question Bank Block","Use Cases","Before You Start"," Question Bank The Question Bank block allows you to display questions dynamically from a pre-built Question Bank database. This block is perfect for keeping your content fresh and engaging without manually creating new questions every time. How to Use the Question Bank Block Click on ADD A BLOCK and select Question Bank . Select Your Bank: Choose the Question Bank you've already created and published. You can only select banks that have been published. Set Parameters: Filter by category or difficulty level, then choose how many questions to display at once (e.g., 5 general knowledge questions and 1 science question). Configure Refresh (Optional): Select the gear icon , open options, and choose Time-Based refresh. Set your refresh interval (e.g., every hour, every 10 hours, or every 24 hours). Use Cases Daily Quizzes: Show a new set of questions every day to encourage repeat visits Leaderboard Integration: Combine with the Leaderboard function to create daily challenges where your audience can return to earn more points Large-Scale Surveys: Collect feedback across many topics without manually creating hundreds of questions Before You Start You need to create and publish a Question Bank before you can use this block. Learn more about configuring Question Banks in quizzes or polls and surveys .",{"id":651,"path":652,"dir":526,"title":653,"description":597,"keywords":654,"body":657},"content:1.Content creation:10.Blocks:8.Time.md","/content-creation/blocks/time","Time",[655,656,109],"1. Date picker","2. Time picker"," Time You can combine any of these blocks into your Riddle. 1. Date picker Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Date picker . Type your question or title, such as \"When's your birthday?\", into the Title field. Your audience can then automcatically select a date when they do the Riddle. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (optional). Add a Label (optional). 2. Time picker Click on ADD A CONTENT BLOCK and select Time picker . Type your question or title, such as \"What time is best to reach you?\", into the Title field. Add an image by clicking on Add image, GIF, or video/audio file (optional). Your audience can then automatically select a time. Add a Label (optional). Options CHANGE MEDIA OPTIONS: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Answers , disable Show media or select a Media ratio . ADD A DESCRIPTION: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Under Form options , enable Description . You can now add extra information or guidance for your audience in the Description field under Form content . Some blocks already have a description field by default. MAKE BLOCK COMPULSORY: Go to the options icon on the right of Form Content . Enable Disable skip button to make the block required and to remove the skip button.",{"id":659,"path":660,"dir":661,"title":662,"description":663,"keywords":664,"body":666},"content:1.Content creation:11.Results:0.The result blocks.md","/content-creation/results/the-result-blocks","results","Result blocks","Once you've created your Riddle content, create results for your audience. There are two options:",[665],"Recommended Content"," Result blocks Once you've created your Riddle content, create results for your audience. There are two options: Result page Redirect to a URL Recommended Content Keep your audience engaged even after they finish a Riddle. The Recommended Content block lets you showcase additional content directly on the result page – so your audience never reaches a dead end and naturally spend more time on your site. You can fully control which content is recommended: Dynamic recommendations - Filter by Riddle type and/or tags to automatically display relevant content. These recommendations refresh every hour to always surface your latest Riddles. Static selections - Choose specific Riddles you want to feature, and they'll always show there statically. Adding the block is simple: just click on \"Add Block\" on the result page and select Recommended Content. This feature helps you drive higher engagement, increase session duration, and create a smoother content journey for your audience. Learn more about adding Recommended Content to your result page . Related articles: Configure results",{"id":668,"path":669,"dir":661,"title":670,"description":671,"keywords":672,"body":684},"content:1.Content creation:11.Results:1.Result page.md","/content-creation/results/result-page","Result page","You can create a result page for your audience where they see their score, title, or other text.",[673,674,675,676,677,678,679,680,681,682,683,109],"1. Add media","2. Add text","3. Add a CTA button","4. Add answered blocks","5. Add share buttons","6. Add result score","7. Add leaderboard","8. Add other personalities","9. Add attributes","10. Add results recap","11. Add recommended content"," Result page You can create a result page for your audience where they see their score, title, or other text. The default page(s) appear(s) automatically when your audience completes the Riddle. You don't have to click on or change anything. There are two default result pages for a quiz, and one default result page for the other Riddle formats. You can also customize the result page(s) by adding and editing result blocks. The available blocks depend on the content type: Block Quiz Poll Personality Predictor Minigame Story Form Media x x x x x x x Text x x x x x x x Button (CTA) x x x x x x x Answered blocks x x x Share buttons x x x x x x x Result score x x x Leaderboard x x Recommended Content x x x x x x x Results recap x Winning Personality x Other Personalities x Attributes x Click on Add a result block bottom left in the CREATE section. Choose Result page . 1. Add media Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Media . Click in the ADD MEDIA box and select your media source, drag and drop, or click to search your files. Click on the media to view the image formatting options. Choose between Media covers complete area and Media fits container . When there are two elements on top of each other, choose between Send image to the foreground and Send image to the background . Double click on the media and then click on EDIT IMAGE to filter, resize, crop, draw, text, shapes, stickers, frame, corners, or merge. 2. Add text Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Text . Double click on the box and enter your text. Make any text style changes using the text editor menu that appears above the text block. 3. Add a CTA button Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Button . The default label is \"Click me\". Click on the CTA button and then on the Edit button content icon. Enter the button text next to Label . Enter the button link next to Link . Enable or disable Open in new tab to decide whether the linked page opens in the same or new tab. Click on the CTA button and then on the Edit button style icon. Go to the Color section and then choose colors for each object. Go to the Text section and then select your preferences for font, capitalization, spacing, height, and alignment. Go to the Sizing section and then select your preferences for border width, corner radius, and choose whether to fill button to grid size. 4. Add answered blocks Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Answered blocks . Answered blocks will appear here. Click on the Answered blocks element and then on the Edit icon. Enable Hide block images to hide block images that you have inserted into your Riddle but do not want your audience to see right now. Enable Hide answer media to hide the answer media that you have inserted into your Riddle but you do not want your audience to see right now. Enable Display percentages for the audience to see these results as percentages. This is enabled by default. Enable Display number of participants for the audience to see the number of participants that have taken part so far. Enable Display total votes for the audience to see the total number of votes so far. Enable Display visual right/wrong indicators for the audience to see a tick/cross next to each right/wrong answer respectively. Enable Display right/wrong message for the audience to see a right/wrong message next to each right/wrong answer respectively. 5. Add share buttons Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Share buttons . Facebook, X, and WhatsApp are the default share buttons and ready to use without any other change. Click on the sharing button and then on the Edit button icon. Decide whether to enable or disable the label. Edit the text in Label . Enable Customize share messages under the General section and fill out every field, and add an optional image. Select the network(s) you would like under Networks , enable Customize share messages for any of your selected networks, and fill out every field/add an optional image. For further networks, scroll down and click on Other networks . Click on the sharing button and then on the Edit button style icon. Go to the Color section and then choose colors for each object. Go to the Text section and then select your preferences for font, capitalization, spacing, height, and alignment. Go to the Sizing section to adjust the size, measured in rem, for each aspect of the share button, as well as the corner radius, measured in percent. 6. Add result score The default result score element is on the result page by default, ready to use without any changes. If you don't yet have a score on your result page, click on the ADD button under your result page and select Result score . To edit, double click on the score and click on the Edit icon. Select a format. Select colors for the circle, background, and text. Disable Fill circle to grid size to manually input the circle radius. 7. Add leaderboard Create a leaderboard . Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Leaderboard . A leaderboard is pre-selected by default. To change the leaderboard, click on the leaderboard element and select the leaderboard title from the dropdown list. The default leaderboard is ready to use without any other change. To edit, double click on the leaderboard element and click on the Edit icon. Enable or Disable Display title . Enable Share button . 8. Add other personalities Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Other personalities . All other personalities will now appear with the default settings without any change. To edit, click on the Other personalities element and then click on the Edit icon. Enable All other results to see all other personalities under the winning personality on the result page. Disable All other results and select or type the number of results in the # of other results to display field to choose how many personalities appear under the winning personality on the result page. Enable Include winning personality to show the winning personality as well as the other personalities. Select an Other results format to choose what information about the other results should be included from the dropdown menu. Select a Layout for the other personalities from the dropdown menu. Select a Media ratio for the personality block media from the dropdown menu. 9. Add attributes Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Attributes . Attributes will now appear with the default settings without any change. To edit, click on the Attributes element and then click on the Edit icon. Enable Show all attributes to see all attributes. Disable Show all attributes and select or type the number of results in the # of other results to display field to choose how many attributes appear on the result page. Select a results format from the dropdown menu. Select a results layout from the dropdown menu. Select a Media ratio for the personality block media from the dropdown menu. 10. Add results recap New Predictors have the Results Recap block by default. You can easily add it to old Predictors on the result page. Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Results recap . The default audience choices will appear here without any further changes necessary. To edit, click on the edit icon and enter or use the up and down arrows to select the amount of results you'd like to show. 11. Add recommended content Keep your audience engaged even after they finish a Riddle. The Recommended Content block lets you showcase additional content directly on the result page – so your audience never reaches a dead end and naturally spend more time on your site. Click on the ADD button under your result page and select Recommended Content . Choose your recommendation type: Dynamic recommendations: Enable Filter by type and select one or more Riddle types (Quiz, Poll/Survey, Personality Quiz, etc.). Enable Filter by tags and select tags to match content with specific tags. Recommendations automatically refresh every hour to surface your latest Riddles. Static selections: Disable dynamic filtering options. Click on Select Riddles and choose specific Riddles you want to feature. These Riddles will always appear statically on the result page. Customize display (optional): Set how many recommendations to show. Choose the layout and styling to match your result page design. This feature helps you drive higher engagement, increase session duration, and create a smoother content journey for your audience. Options 1. Show a result page after the closing date (poll and predictor only) Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls , scroll down, enable Show the result page after the closing date , and select a result page from the dropdown menu. 2. Delete an element Click on an element and click on the delete bin icon. 3. Move an element Click on the six dots top left on any element and drag it to your preferred position. There are gridlines in the background to help you position the elements. 4. Undo/redo changes Click on the back or forward arrow next to RESULT . Related articles: Configure results The result blocks",{"id":686,"path":687,"dir":661,"title":688,"description":689,"keywords":690,"body":694},"content:1.Content creation:11.Results:2.Redirect to URL.md","/content-creation/results/redirect-to-url","Redirect to URL","You can create a redirect so that your Riddle audience is taken directly to a website after completing the Riddle.",[691,692,693],"Create result-dependant redirect","Add a delay","Go full-screen"," Redirect to URL You can create a redirect so that your Riddle audience is taken directly to a website after completing the Riddle. Click on Add a result block bottom left in the CREATE section. Choose Redirect to URL . Write the URL in the Content field. Make sure the URL follows this structure: https:// + site name. We recommend copying and pasting the URL you want directly from the website's address bar. Add an image/audio/video and enter text into the Title and/or Description fields if you want your audience to see visuals or a message before the redirected website appears. Create result-dependant redirect You can send your Riddle audience to different URLs, based on their responses. For example, your audience who got result A -> URL A, those who got result B -> URL B. Go to the Results section under Blocks in the CREATE section. Add more results blocks as above. Click on Configure results and adjust the score ranges c to choose which result should lead to which redirect. Add a delay You can set a time before the audience is taken to the URL. Click on the Options icon on the right of Content . Enable Delayed redirect . The default setting is 5 seconds. Type a number or use the up and down arrows to choose the delay in seconds. Go full-screen You can show the website as a full-screen view rather than inside your Riddle's iframe. Click on the Options icon on the right of Content . Enable Open redirect page outside the Riddle iframe .",{"id":696,"path":697,"dir":661,"title":698,"description":699,"keywords":700,"body":701},"content:1.Content creation:11.Results:3.Configure results.md","/content-creation/results/configure-results","Configure results","You can configure results and result ranges for a quiz.",[]," Configure results You can configure results and result ranges for a quiz. In your Riddle quiz, click on CONFIGURE RESULTS under the questions and results. Click and drag the circles on the slider to set which percentage range leads to which result page. Click on the plus icon to zoom in on the slider. To assign a result page to a percentage range, go to Displays result and select a result page or redirect from the dropdown menu. Related articles: Result page",{"id":703,"path":704,"dir":705,"title":706,"description":707,"keywords":708,"body":714},"content:1.Content creation:12. Branching logic:0.Branching logic for questions.md","/content-creation/branching-logic/branching-logic-for-questions","branching-logic","Branching logic for questions","Branching logic allows you to show different questions to your audience based on their previous responses.",[709,710,711,712,713],"Linear logic","Data layer / Form fields","Answer","Block score","Total score"," Branching logic for questions Branching logic allows you to show different questions to your audience based on their previous responses. Go to the Scoring & branching logic icon on the left and click on QUESTIONS . Go to the relevant content block and then select a Branching type . There are five options to choose from: Linear Data layer / Form fields Answer Block score Total score Linear logic There is no branching logic and the blocks will follow on consecutively. This is the default setting. Data layer / Form fields The next block depends on a condition set applying or not. This can be based on Data layer items you set up for the Riddle or form fields. For example: If form field entry [equals/doesn't equal/contains/does not contain/starts with/doesn't start with/ends with/doesn't end with/is empty/is not empty] your entered [value] applies, show block B. If form field entry [equals/doesn't equal/contains/does not contain/starts with/doesn't start with/ends with/doesn't end with/is empty/is not empty] your entered [value] doesn't apply, show block C. If form checkbox [is checked/is not cheked/skipped] is true, show question B. If form checkbox [is checked/is not cheked/skipped] is false, show question C. If Data layer variable [equals/doesn't equal/contains/does not contain/starts with/doesn't start with/ends with/doesn't end with/is empty/is not empty] your entered [value] applies, show block B. If Data layer variable [equals/doesn't equal/contains/does not contain/starts with/doesn't start with/ends with/doesn't end with/is empty/is not empty] your entered [value] doesn't apply, show block C. Answer The next block depends on what your audience answered in the previous block. For example: If your audience answers A, show question B. Multiple-choice blocks do not support branching logic by answers. Block score The next block depends on your audience's score in the previous block. For example: If your audience gets > X points in block A, show question B. If \u003C X points, show question C. Question-level e.g. Your audience gets X points if the question is correct. Answer-level e.g. Your audience gets different points for each answer. You can use a slider and create branches around different scores, each showing a different block. Total score The next block depends on your audience's score in all preceding blocks. For example: If your audience has > X cumulative points, show question A. If your audience has \u003C X cumulative points, show question B.",{"id":716,"path":717,"dir":705,"title":718,"description":707,"keywords":719,"body":724},"content:1.Content creation:12. Branching logic:1.Branching logic for results.md","/content-creation/branching-logic/branching-logic-for-results","Branching logic for results",[720,721,722,723],"Quiz scoring with branching logic","Move blocks","Copy blocks","Zoom"," Branching logic for results Branching logic allows you to show different questions to your audience based on their previous responses. You can use this for the quiz, poll / survey, and personality test formats. Go to the Scoring & branching logic icon on the left and click on RESULTS . To automatically adjust ranges, click and drag the circles on the slider to adjust the scores to set up which score leads to which result page. Click on the plus icon to zoom in on the slider. To manually assign results for a specific branch you can click on the edit icon for the Score range you want to change and click and drag the circles on the slider to adjust the scores. Quiz scoring with branching logic The denominator for scoring calculations is [branch with highest possible score], not [score for that particular branch]. For example, if there are two branches - one with 6 maximum points, the other with 10 maximum points - the denominator will always be 10. Move blocks Drag and drop block to the new location. To include an entire branch of blocks, press Shift while dragging. Copy blocks Hold the Control or Command key while dragging the block. The original block will remain and a copy will be inserted in the new location. To include an entire branch of blocks, press Shift and Control / Command . Zoom Hold Shift while scrolling up or down. ",{"id":726,"path":727,"dir":705,"title":728,"description":9,"keywords":729,"body":732},"content:1.Content creation:12. Branching logic:2.Navigate branching logic.md","/content-creation/branching-logic/navigate-branching-logic","Navigate branching logic",[721,722,723,730,731],"Reset/undo/redo logic","Remove a block from the logic"," Navigate branching logic Move blocks Drag and drop block to the new location. To include an entire branch of blocks, press Shift while dragging. Copy blocks Hold the Control or Command key while dragging the block. The original block will remain and a copy will be inserted in the new location. To include an entire branch of blocks, press Shift and Control / Command . Zoom Hold Shift while scrolling up or down. Reset/undo/redo logic Click on the trash can icon to delete the logic. Click on the back arrow icon to undo the last logic change. Click on the forward arrow icon to redo the last logic change. Remove a block from the logic Click on the three dots on any block. Click on DELETE FROM LOGIC . The block will now appear under the Unused blocks list in the top right corner. To add the block back into the logic, click on the block, drag, and drop it to the desired position.",{"id":734,"path":735,"dir":63,"title":736,"description":737,"keywords":738,"body":739},"content:1.Content creation:12.Create a Riddle with AI.md","/content-creation/create-a-riddle-with-ai","Create a Riddle with AI","You can build quizzes, polls/surveys, and personality quizzes using the AI builder.",[]," Create a Riddle with AI You can build quizzes, polls/surveys, and personality quizzes using the AI builder. You can create Riddles with AI on any Riddle subscription, with a monthly limit depending on each plan: Essential: 5 AI Riddles per month Pro: 15 AI Riddles per month Business: 30 AI Riddles per month Enterprise: 50 AI Riddles per month In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE . In the pop-up that appears, click on Create from topic with AI . In the pop-up flow that appears, select a type , enter a topic , select the number of questions and select a difficulty . When your Riddle is ready, edit , embed , or share it.",{"id":741,"path":742,"dir":63,"title":743,"description":744,"keywords":745,"body":746},"content:1.Content creation:13.Create a Riddle from URL.md","/content-creation/create-a-riddle-from-url","Create a Riddle from URL","You can build quizzes, polls/surveys, and personality quizzes using a URL and the AI builder.",[]," Create a Riddle from URL You can build quizzes, polls/surveys, and personality quizzes using a URL and the AI builder. You can create Riddles from URLs with AI on any Riddle subscription, with a monthly limit depending on each plan: Essential: 5 URL/topic AI Riddles per month Pro: 15 URL/topic AI Riddles per month Business: 30 URL/topic AI Riddles per month Enterprise: 50 URL/topic AI Riddles per month In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE . In the pop-up that appears, click on Create from URL with AI . In the pop-up flow that appears, select a type , enter a URL , select the number of questions and select a difficulty . When your Riddle is ready, edit , embed , or share it.",{"id":748,"path":749,"dir":63,"title":750,"description":751,"keywords":752,"body":754},"content:1.Content creation:14.Create a Riddle from file upload.md","/content-creation/create-a-riddle-from-file-upload","Create a Riddle from file upload","You can build quizzes, polls/surveys, and predictors from a file containing your questions, answers, and other content.",[753],"Tips for your uploads"," Create a Riddle from file upload You can build quizzes, polls/surveys, and predictors from a file containing your questions, answers, and other content. In the Riddle Creator, click on CREATE RIDDLE . In the popup that appears, click on Quiz , Poll/Survey , or Predictor , and then Create [Quiz/Poll/Predictor] from file upload . In the popup that appears, click on Upload file at the bottom of the box. Alternatively, you can also click on a block type to download an .xlsx template for your content. Select an .xlsx, .csv, or .pdf file and click on Upload . Click on the send icon. If it hasn't been automatically detected, select the block types. Confirm Riddle creation by clicking Yes . When your Riddle is ready, edit , embed , or share direct link . Tips for your uploads The \"Correct answer\" will automatically be taken into account as a \"Choice\". You therefore do not have to repeat it as an answer choice. The number of choices can be different for different questions, e.g. two for question 1, four for question 2. Make sure you test your images URLs before using to check they are all available.",{"id":756,"path":757,"dir":63,"title":758,"description":759,"keywords":760,"body":761},"content:1.Content creation:15.Convert blocks.md","/content-creation/convert-blocks","Convert blocks","You can convert some block types to another block type, saving time instead of starting from scratch if you would prefer a different type after creating.",[]," Convert blocks You can convert some block types to another block type, saving time instead of starting from scratch if you would prefer a different type after creating. In your Riddle, click on the three dots on the right of any block title and select the CONVERT TO: BLOCK TYPE of your choice. Your content will now appear in the converted block, replacing the original block. Make changes to your Riddle as necessary. Here is a comprehensive list of which blocks can be converted: Riddle type Original block Convertable to Quiz Single-select Multi-select Order it Type the answer Multi-select Single-select Order it Tap and find None Order it Single-select Multi-select Type the answer Single-select Multi-select Spot the difference Tap and Find Poll / Survey Single-select Multi-select Order it Free text Multi-select Single-select Reaction poll Single-select Multi-select Upvote Single-select Multi-select Swiper Single-select Personality quiz Single-select Multi-select Multi-select Single-select Predictor Pick the winner Guess the score Guess the score Pick the winner All Riddle types Ad Block Text/media Quote Make a form None Name Any other \"short text\" form block Email Any other \"short text\" form block Telephone Any other \"short text\" form block URL Any other \"short text\" form block Country selector Dropdown None Privacy Checkbox Date picker Time picker Time picker Date picker Short text Any other \"short text\" form block Long text Long text Any other \"short text\" form block Number Any other \"short text\" form block Text/media Ad block Quote None Radio button Single-select Rating scale Single-select Radio button",{"id":763,"path":764,"dir":63,"title":765,"description":766,"keywords":767,"body":773},"content:1.Content creation:16.Guesses and lives.md","/content-creation/guesses-and-lives","Guesses and lives","Tap & find, Order it, Type the answer, and Spot the difference blocks have integrated Guesses and Lives functions.",[768,769,770,771,772],"Give your audience unlimited guesses","Change the guesses icon","Change the number of guesses","Switch off the guesses display","Change the guesses text"," Guesses and lives Tap & find, Order it, Type the answer, and Spot the difference blocks have integrated Guesses and Lives functions. The Guesses function gives the audience a certain number of guesses for that block. The default number of guesses is one. Give your audience unlimited guesses In the block, click on the Options icon. Enable Unlimited guesses . Change the guesses icon In the block, click on the Options icon. Click on the arrow next to Guesses icon and select an option from the dropdown menu. There are three types: Heart Numerical X Change the number of guesses In the block, click on the Options icon. Change the number in the # of guesses field. Switch off the guesses display In the block, click on the Options icon. Disable Display no. of guesses . Change the guesses text In the block, click on the Options icon. Change or delete the text in the Guesses text field. ",{"id":775,"path":776,"dir":63,"title":777,"description":9,"keywords":778,"body":779},"content:1.Content creation:17.Shuffle answers.md","/content-creation/shuffle-answers","Shuffle answers",[]," Shuffle answers You can shuffle answers for a particular question block. Go to the CREATE section. Click on the Settings icon on the right of ANSWER CONTENT . Under ANSWERS , enable Shuffle answers.",{"id":781,"path":782,"dir":63,"title":783,"description":784,"keywords":785,"body":790},"content:1.Content creation:18.Use dynamic variables.md","/content-creation/use-dynamic-variables","Use dynamic variables","You can use dynamic variables to speak directly to your audience in your Riddle and personalize what they see.",[786,787,788,789],"Variable types","Add a form field variable","Add a block answer variable","Add a data layer variable"," Use dynamic variables You can use dynamic variables to speak directly to your audience in your Riddle and personalize what they see. Variables are automatically created for you in every Riddle, and you can use them in text blocks and form fields as pre-filled values. Variable types There are 3 types of variables you can use in your Riddle: Form field variables : Variables created by Riddle audience form entries. These variables store data entered by your audience when taking the quiz. Block answer variables: Variables created from Riddle content. These variables store answers to previous questions and are created automatically as you create new question blocks. Data layer variables : Variables created through the Riddle Data Layer . When you set up data layer items, these items are turned into variables you can use throughout your quiz. Add a form field variable Create a Riddle and include a form field. In any subsequent block, go to a title or answer explanation text field, click on the % icon and select a select a form field from the dropdown list. The information your audience previously provided will then appear at your chosen position in this block. Add a block answer variable Create a Riddle and include answer content. In any subsequent block, go to a title or answer explanation text field, click on the % icon and select a select a block answer variable from the dropdown list. The answer your audience previously provided will then appear at your chosen position in this block. Add a data layer variable For advanced marketing professionals, combining variables and the Riddle Data Layer is a great way to pass data from external sources into the Riddle, use it as dynamic content, and then pass it back to your data warehouse along with the Riddle data. Create a Riddle. In any block, go to a title or answer explanation text field, click on the % icon and select a select a data layer variable from the dropdown list. The variable will then appear at your chosen position in this block. ",{"id":792,"path":793,"dir":63,"title":794,"description":9,"keywords":795,"body":800},"content:1.Content creation:19.Your templates.md","/content-creation/your-templates","Your templates",[796,797,798,799],"Use > 100 ready-to-use templates","Save a Riddle as a template","Create a Riddle from a template","Delete a template"," Your templates Use > 100 ready-to-use templates Qzzr has over 100 ready-to-use templates that make content creation easy and fast for you. You can find them under Quick Create templates on your Q list, or click on CREATE , then Browse templates . Save a Riddle as a template In the Creator, click on the three dots next to the Riddle you’d like to save and then click on SAVE AS TEMPLATE . Type a name into the Name your template field and click on CREATE TEMPLATE . Note: Only Project Admins and Editors can create templates. Create a Riddle from a template Click on CREATE RIDDLE . Click on Browse templates and select a Riddle from one of the categories. Delete a template Click on CREATE RIDDLE . Click on Browse templates and then Your personal templates/Project templates . Click on the preview icon on the right of a Riddle. Click on DELETE . In the popup that appears, click on DELETE TEMPLATE . Note: Only Project Admins can delete templates.",{"id":802,"path":803,"dir":63,"title":804,"description":805,"keywords":806,"body":816},"content:1.Content creation:20.Organize your Riddles.md","/content-creation/organize-your-riddles","Organize your Riddles","You can organize your Ridles in different ways to make sure you can access and work with your creations quickly and easily.",[807,808,809,810,811,812,813,814,815],"Add a new tag","Add an existing tag to a Riddle","Remove a tag from a Riddle","View Riddles by tag","Filter your Riddles by status","Add notes to a Riddle","View or edit Riddle notes","Switch Riddle view","Apply bulk changes"," Organize your Riddles You can organize your Ridles in different ways to make sure you can access and work with your creations quickly and easily. Add a new tag In the Creator, click on the three dots next to the Riddle and click on ADD TAGS . Enter your tag name into the Add new tags field. The created tag will appear in green under New tag created . Click on that tag to add it to this Riddle and click on CLOSE . Add an existing tag to a Riddle In the Creator, click on the three dots next to the Riddle and click on ADD TAGS . Select an existing tag and click on CLOSE . Remove a tag from a Riddle In the Creator, click on the three dots next to the Riddle and click on ADD TAGS . Current tags will appear in purple under Selected tags . Click on any selected tag and click on CLOSE . View Riddles by tag In the Creator, click on the tag icon top right and select the tag you want to filter by. Filter your Riddles by status In the Creator, clik on the filter icon top right and select a filter from the dropdown menu. Add notes to a Riddle In the Creator, click on the three dots next to the Riddle and click on ADD NOTES . Enter your notes into the text field and click on SAVE NOW . Any Riddle that has notes will have a post-it icon. These notes are just for you or your colleagues, not your audience. You can make notes about different versions or recent changes, for example. View or edit Riddle notes In the Creator, click on the post-it icon under/next to your Riddle. If you edit the note, click on SAVE NOW . Switch Riddle view In the Creator, select the grid view icon top right to see your Riddles in rows of four with their cover picture, title, and further information underneath or on hover. In the Creator, select the list view icon top right to see your Riddles as a list of titles on the left with their information on the right. Apply bulk changes In the Creator, click on SELECT . Select the Riddles you want to change and click on the action button required. If you choose to delete a Riddle or multiple Riddles, check all the boxes in the pop up and click on DELETE FOREVER . ",{"id":818,"path":819,"dir":63,"title":820,"description":821,"keywords":822,"body":830},"content:1.Content creation:21.Switch from Riddle 1 to 2.md","/content-creation/switch-from-riddle-1-to-2","Switch from Riddle 1.0 to 2.0","Moving your content from Riddle 1.0 to Riddle 2.0 only takes a few clicks – no need to manually recreate your Riddles.",[823,824,825,826,827,828,829],"How to migrate","What gets migrated","What does not get migrated","What happens to my 1.0 Riddle?","Undo a migration","Why migrate to 2.0?","FAQ"," Switch from Riddle 1.0 to 2.0 Moving your content from Riddle 1.0 to Riddle 2.0 only takes a few clicks – no need to manually recreate your Riddles. Watch the step-by-step walkthrough video or follow the steps below. How to migrate Switch to Riddle 1.0: click on the top-right menu and select the Back to 1.0 option. Find the Riddle you want to migrate and click on Migrate to 2.0 . Your Riddle is now available in Riddle 2.0 – find it in your 2.0 dashboard using the 2.0 Riddle migration tag. That's it! Your content, including questions, answers, and media, is brought over automatically. Currently, migration works one Riddle at a time. If you need to migrate many Riddles at once, contact our support team via the chat for a bulk migration. What gets migrated Content – All your questions, answers, images, and text are transferred to 2.0. Stats – Your existing statistics from 1.0 are migrated to 2.0, so you won't lose any historical data. Embeds – Any existing embeds on your website update automatically. No need to re-embed or change any code on your site. Design – Your color palette and styles are carried over and a new palette is created in 2.0 automatically. No manual adjustments needed. What does not get migrated Leads – Lead data from 1.0 is not transferred to 2.0. Lead integrations – All lead integrations (Google Sheets, Mailchimp, ActiveCampaign, etc.) need to be set up again in 2.0. Before migrating, disable the integration in your 1.0 Riddle first, then migrate, and set up the integration fresh in 2.0. See our lead generation guide for how to configure integrations in 2.0. Custom CSS – Custom CSS from 1.0 is not migrated, as the underlying structure of 2.0 is too different. You will need to recreate any custom CSS in 2.0. Unsupported Riddle types – The following 1.0 types cannot be migrated: Tap & Find , Spot the Difference , and Question Bank . What happens to my 1.0 Riddle? Your original 1.0 Riddle is not deleted. It stays in your 1.0 dashboard. However, after migration you can only edit the Riddle in 2.0 – the 1.0 version becomes read-only. Undo a migration Changed your mind? You can click on Reset migration in your 1.0 dashboard to revert a Riddle back to 1.0. This gives you full edit access in 1.0 again. You can reset and re-migrate as many times as you like. Why migrate to 2.0? Riddle 2.0 is a complete rebuild of the platform with many additional features and a more flexible builder. Once your content is in 2.0, you can take advantage of all the new capabilities right away, including: Mix and match different question types in a single Riddle Branching logic for questions and results AI quiz generator Minigames like sudoku and spin the wheel Fully customizable result page layouts If you have any questions about the migration process, reach out to our support team – we're happy to help. FAQ Will my embed code break? \nNo. Existing embed codes continue to work and will automatically display the migrated 2.0 version. No changes needed on your website. What about my statistics and leads? \nStats carry over to 2.0, so you won't lose any historical data. Lead data is not migrated – you will need to set up lead collection fresh in 2.0. What about integrations (webhooks, Zapier, etc.)? \nIntegrations need to be deactivated in 1.0 and set up fresh in 2.0, as the systems are architecturally different. Can I undo the migration? \nYes, the migration can be reset at any time to go back to the 1.0 version. Can I migrate all my Riddles at once? \nFor bulk migrations, contact the Riddle support team.",{"id":832,"path":833,"dir":834,"title":835,"description":836,"keywords":837,"body":840},"content:2.Advanced creation:0.Embed placeholder.md","/advanced-creation/embed-placeholder","advanced-creation","Embed placeholder","As well as embedding individual Riddles, you can also embed a whole series of Riddles to appear in the same place with conditions set by you.",[838,839],"Create an embed placeholder","Set up a quiz placeholder that auto-refreshes daily"," Embed placeholder As well as embedding individual Riddles, you can also embed a whole series of Riddles to appear in the same place with conditions set by you. Create an embed placeholder Publish all the Riddles you want to include in the placeholder. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Embed placeholder . Click on CREATE PLACEHOLDER or CREATE YOUR FIRST PLACEHOLDER . Enter a title and click on CONTINUE , or click on DO THIS LATER . Select a Riddle from the dropdown menu. This will be the default Riddle for the placeholder. Click on ADD CONDITION . Select a Start date and End date .\nIf someone in your audience is actively playing while the end date is reached, they will be shown an error message, forcing them to refresh the placeholder. By default, you can down select a Riddle from the dropdown menu, using the searchbar if necessary. To set up a tag rather than choose a specific Riddle, select Tag from the dropdown menu under Specific Riddle or from tag and then select a Tag condition , Tag , and Refresh interval . Repeat steps five to eight for as many different Riddles as you like. Click on the black copy button to duplicate a condition, or on the red trash button to delete a condition. Click, drag, and drop the six dots top left of any condition to reorder the conditions. Go to the Publish section and then click on PUBLISH . Go to the Embed/Landing page section, click on GET THE CODE or ADVANCED , copy the embed code, and paste it into your website publishing site. Set up a quiz placeholder that auto-refreshes daily You can set up a placeholder to auto-refresh to a new quiz every day via tags. Create a new project (e.g. \"Daily Quizzes\") to keep all your auto-refresh quizzes in one place and build your quizzes for this placeholder in that project. For every quiz you create: Publish it. Go to the YOUR RIDDLES section, click on the three dots next to the title, and click on ADD TAGS . Type a tag (always the same one), e.g. \"daily quiz\", into the Add new tags field, click on the green plus button Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on the + next to Embed placeholder , enter a name (e.g. \"Daily Quiz Placeholder\") and click on CONTINUE . Apply the following settings: Default Riddle: don't select any unless you want one. Click on ADD CONDITION : Set the start date to any date in the past. Leave the end date. Specific Riddle or Tag: Choose \"Tag\" Tag conditions: \"Last published\" Select a tag: \"daily quiz\" (The tag you add to every quiz after publishing it) Go to the Publish section and then click on PUBLISH . Go to the Embed/Landing page section, click on GET THE CODE , click on COPY , and paste it into your website creator. The placeholder will show the last published Riddle with the \"Daily Quiz\" tag without you having to do anything else. Note: Updating will take up to five minutes after adding the tag.",{"id":842,"path":843,"dir":834,"title":844,"description":845,"keywords":846,"body":850},"content:2.Advanced creation:1.Riddle in a Riddle.md","/advanced-creation/riddle-in-a-riddle","Riddle in a Riddle","You can chain multiple Riddles together so they flow seamlessly into each other. Your audience experiences one continuous journey, but behind the scenes each Riddle can have its own design, settings, and content type.",[847,340,108,848,849],"When to use this","Reporting, leads, and data passing","Tips"," Riddle in a Riddle You can chain multiple Riddles together so they flow seamlessly into each other. Your audience experiences one continuous journey, but behind the scenes each Riddle can have its own design, settings, and content type. When to use this Multi-stage campaigns - Start with a quiz, then redirect to a personality test, then to a lead form - each with different designs Progressive profiling - Collect different information at each stage without overwhelming your audience with one long form Mixed content types - Combine a poll with a quiz and a story in one seamless experience A/B testing flows - Use branching logic in Riddle A to redirect different audience segments to different Riddle B variants Gated content - Show a teaser quiz, collect an email, then redirect to the full experience How it works The technique uses the Redirect to URL result block. Instead of showing a result page, Riddle A redirects your audience to Riddle B's landing page URL. The transition is seamless for your audience. Setup Create your first Riddle (Riddle A). For the results, add a Redirect to URL block instead of a result page. Create your second Riddle (Riddle B). Publish Riddle B and copy its landing page URL. Paste Riddle B's URL into Riddle A's redirect URL field. Publish Riddle A. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for as many Riddles as you want to chain together. Reporting, leads, and data passing Each Riddle in the chain operates independently: Separate analytics - Every Riddle has its own Analyze tab with views, starts, completions, and audience data. This lets you see exactly where in the chain your audience drops off. Separate lead collection - Leads are collected per Riddle. Set up lead integrations on each Riddle individually. Pass data between Riddles - Use the data layer to pass information (e.g. name, score, answers) from one Riddle to the next via URL parameters. This way Riddle B can greet your audience by name or adjust content based on their Riddle A results. Tips Each Riddle in the chain can have a completely different design, palette, and settings You can use branching logic in Riddle A to redirect your audience to different follow-up Riddles based on their score or answers Test the full chain before publishing to make sure the redirects work smoothly",{"id":852,"path":853,"dir":854,"title":855,"description":9,"keywords":856,"body":861},"content:3.Design:0.Image sizes and ratios.md","/design/image-sizes-and-ratios","design","Image sizes and ratios",[857,858,859,860,39],"Four media sizes / ratios:","Set a default media size","Change any single media size","Optimize GIFs"," Image sizes and ratios Four media sizes / ratios: Wide - default and recommended Ratio: 16:9 Size: 960 x 540px Your media will be wider than than it is tall. This 'landscape' orientation works best across all screen sizes (especially mobile). Square Ratio: 1:1 720 x 720px This is designed for images like Instagram photos where the height and width are equal. Tall Ratio: 9:16 Size: 540 x 960px Your media will be tall, which will give you more space for fashion shots, book covers, and other media with a 'portrait' orientation . Original media ratio Your media keeps its existing ratio (for example, Q1 might be 12:9 ratio, while Q2 and Q3 are 7:4). Set a default media size You can set a size to apply to all media in your Riddle, from the cover to questions, answers, and results. Go to the Design section. Go to Default media ratio . Select one of the four sizes from the dropdown menu. Change any single media size You can change the size to override the default settings for any single block. Click on the block you want to customize. Click on the Options icon in the top right corner. Under Media ratio , select a size from the dropdown menu. Optimize GIFs Our image provider has a 100MB limit for your GIF's total file size. There's no standard GIF size or the right average size of a GIF but here are some tips: Make each frame as small as possible in Photoshop or whatever your designer used. 960x540 for our wide format is ideal. Reduce the number of frames per second, something like five or six per second is fine. Use a free tool like https://ezgif.com/optimize to reduce the file size by about 40%. Make use of the lazy loading option if your .GIF size is bigger. This enables each image to load 'just in time' rather than all images loading at once. Top tips Use jpg or png formats for images. Aim for a maximum image size of 250KB. You can edit images, not animated GIFs or videos. Aim for a maximum video size of 10MB, compressing before uploading if necessary. Smaller images mean your Riddle loads faster for your audience. We automatically compress all pictures by 80% to keep every Riddle's speed and quality high. If you have some very large files, you can speed up your quiz loading times by reducing the overall pixel dimensions and file size.",{"id":863,"path":864,"dir":854,"title":865,"description":866,"keywords":867,"body":878},"content:3.Design:1.Customize the design.md","/design/customize-the-design","Customize the design","Use palettes to customize your Riddle's look and feel.",[868,869,870,871,872,873,874,875,876,877],"Apply a default Riddle palette","Customize a default Riddle palette","Create your own palette","Edit one of your palettes","Change palettes","Change colors","Block instructions","Block image as blurred background","Block media as Riddle background","Riddle border radius"," Customize the design Use palettes to customize your Riddle's look and feel. Apply a default Riddle palette There are 9 ready-to-use Riddle palettes that you can apply as they are or customize further. Timeless is the default palette for any new Riddle. Go to the Design section. Select one of the 9 palettes:\n Dark mode Cool Forest Rocketship Peachy Stagecoach Accent Minigame Timeless You will see the palette applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Customize a default Riddle palette Go to the Design section. Click on the three dots on the right of any palette. Click on COPY AND EDIT PALETTE . Enter a name in the Type your preset name here field and click on SAVE . Change as many things as you like with the font and colors. Click on APPLY every time you change a color. Click on SAVE PALETTE . In the pop-up window that appears, click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the palette applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Create your own palette Go to the Design section. Scroll down and click on CREATE A PALETTE . Change as many things as you like with the font and colors. Click on SAVE PALETTE . You will see the palette applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Edit one of your palettes Go to the Design section. Click on the three dots on the right of the palette you want to change and click on CUSTOMIZE . Change as many things as you like with the font and colors. Click on SAVE PALETTE . In the pop-up window that appears, click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the palette applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Change palettes Go to the Design section. Select the palette you want to use for the Riddle you're creating. You will see the palette applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Change colors Go to the Design section. Click on the three dots next to the palette you want to change. Click on CUSTOMIZE or COPY AND EDIT PALETTE . Click on the color / arrow next to each element. The color options are split into five sections:\n Global Answers Buttons Pagination Footer To choose a specific color, use the color selector sliders, the color squares on the right, or by typing the color code in the HEX field. To choose a basic color, click on the icon and select one of the 20 colors. Click on APPLY . Click on SAVE PALETTE . In the pop-up window that appears, click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the palette applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Block instructions Every block has an instructions label that tells your audience what they have to do in this block. Block instructions are enabled by default. Go to the Design section. Enable/disable Show block instructions . Block image as blurred background You can set up your Riddle to use a blurred version of your block image as the background for your block content below your media. Block image as blurred background is on by default. Go to the Design section. Enable/disable Block image as blurred background . You can only enable this if Block media as Riddle background is disabled. Block media as Riddle background You can set up your Riddle to use the block media as the Riddle background. If you have a video/gif/audio file, there is a \"Play\" button. There's a background overlay over the image, determined by the Riddle background palette value. Go to the Design section. Enable/disable Block media as Riddle background . You can only enable this if Block image as blurred background is disabled. Riddle border radius You can set the exact radius for the edges of your Riddle in px. The default is 24px. Go to the Design section. Enter a number or use the up and down arrows to set a radius in px. The maximum is 50px.",{"id":880,"path":881,"dir":854,"title":882,"description":9,"keywords":883,"body":884},"content:3.Design:2.Change the block style.md","/design/change-the-block-style","Change the block style",[]," Change the block style Go to the Options icon on the right of Answer content . Go to Style . Flexible height is enabled by default. Flexible height resizes your Riddle block automatically based on the amount of text in your block. Disable if you want your Riddle block to have a fixed size. Your audience might then need to scroll up/down to view all of your questions and answers. Go to Style and select Row or Stack from the dropdown menu next to Layout . The default setting means your Riddle will 'wrap' extra blocks in new rows, so all answers can be viewed at once. Disable if you prefer not to have this wrapping. Your audience then need to scroll to view all of the items. We recommend experimenting to see what works best for your needs.",{"id":886,"path":887,"dir":854,"title":888,"description":889,"keywords":890,"body":895},"content:3.Design:3.Change the font.md","/design/change-the-font","Change the font","You can use one of the 35 hand-selected fonts, Google Fonts, Adobe Fonts / Typekit, or use your own font.",[891,892,893,894],"Use a pre-selected font","Use an Adobe Font / Typekit","Use a Google Font","Use your own font"," Change the font You can use one of the 35 hand-selected fonts, Google Fonts, Adobe Fonts / Typekit, or use your own font. Use a pre-selected font Go to the Design section. Click on the three dots next to the palette you want to use and click on CUSTOMIZE or COPY AND EDIT PALETTE . Riddle palettes such as Timeless are defaults and you can therefore only copy and edit these palettes. Select the font you want from the dropdown menu. In the pop-up window that appears, tick the Yes, I understand box and click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the font applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Use an Adobe Font / Typekit Create an Adobe Fonts web project . In Riddle, go to the Design section. Click on the three dots next to the palette you want to use and click on CUSTOMIZE or COPY AND EDIT PALETTE . Riddle palettes such as Timeless are defaults and you can therefore only copy and edit these palettes. Click on the arrow on the right of the current font (Inter is the default) and select Use your own font . Go to Font Provider and select Adobe Fonts / Typekit . Go to Project ID and paste the Adobe Fonts project ID in the Write something field. It will look something like 'vxgJFgt'. Go to the Font overrides and enter different fonts in the Write something fields for Body , Button , Choice , and Header (if you want). Click on SAVE PALETTE button. In the pop-up window that appears, tick the Yes, I understand box and click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the font applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Use a Google Font Go to the Design section. Click on the three dots next to the palette you want to use and click on CUSTOMIZE or COPY AND EDIT PALETTE . Riddle Style is the default and you can therefore only copy and edit this palette. Click on the arrow on the right of the current font (Arimo is the default) and select Use your own font . Go to Font Provider and select Google Fonts from the dropdown menu. Go to Font family name and select a name from the dropdown menu. Enter different fonts in the Write something fields for Body , Button , Choice , and Header (if you want). The word inherit indicates that it should be the font from above. Click on SAVE PALETTE . In the pop-up window that appears, tick the Yes, I understand box and click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the font applied directly to your Riddle on the screen. Use your own font Ensure your font file is in .woff2 format. Ask Riddle to serve your font (highly recommended) to prevent some browsers raising errors about cross-origin resources . OR Have the URL where your .woff2 font file is stored on your server ready. In Riddle, go to the Design section. Click on the three dots next to the palette you want to use and click on CUSTOMIZE or COPY AND EDIT PALETTE . Riddle Style is the default and you can therefore only copy and edit this palette. Click on the arrow on the right of the current font (Arimo is the default) and select Use your own font . Go to Font Provider and select Use your own font . Go to Font family name and enter the font family name in the Write something field. Go to URL for hosted font and enter the URL that hosts the font in the Write something field. Go to the Font overrides and enter different fonts in the Write something fields for Body , Button , Choice , and Header (if you want). Click on the blue SAVE PALETTE button. In the pop-up window that appears, tick the Yes, I understand box and click on UPDATE MY PALETTES to confirm that all Riddles using this palette will be updated too. You will see the font applied directly to your Riddle on the screen.",{"id":897,"path":898,"dir":854,"title":899,"description":9,"keywords":900,"body":901},"content:3.Design:4.Edit an image.md","/design/edit-an-image","Edit an image",[]," Edit an image Click on EDIT or on the media itself. Attribution texts and alt tags can also be changed here. Click on EDIT IMAGE . Here you can: Filter Resize Crop Draw Add text Add shapes Add stickers Add frames Add corners Merge Click on Apply . Click on Done and then Close . Click on DONE to save your changes. ",{"id":903,"path":904,"dir":854,"title":905,"description":906,"keywords":907,"body":908},"content:3.Design:5.White label your Riddle.md","/design/white-label-your-riddle","White label your Riddle","There are different design options and settings to white label your Riddle so that it seamlessly matches your brand.",[]," White label your Riddle There are different design options and settings to white label your Riddle so that it seamlessly matches your brand. Change colors and fonts. You can change the colors for global text, answer text, and button elements with all subscription plans. Disable the Riddle logo. By default, the Riddle logo is at the bottom of every block in your Riddle. With a Pro subscription or higher, you can remove the Riddle logo and add your own logo and footer text . Use your brand font. With a Business subscription or higher, you can upload your own font(s) . Use company videos. You can add insert and upload images with all subscriptions, but with a Business subscription or higher, you can also insert mp4 videos into any Riddle block. Customize almost every visual aspect of your Riddle using CSS. With a Business subscription or higher, you can add CSS to customize your Riddle styling . You can either copy and paste our most popular CSS codes or use your own to move, hide, and change elements such as buttons, borders, hover states, layout. Get bespoke customization and CSS code. With an Enterprise subscription, you can brief or contact us for specific requirements and our creation experts and frontend developers will work to source the code you need.",{"id":910,"path":911,"dir":854,"title":912,"description":913,"keywords":914,"body":920},"content:3.Design:6.Your own media library.md","/design/your-own-media-library","Your own media library","You can upload your regularly used media files, organize them, and access them quickly again.",[915,916,917,918,919],"Upload media into the media library","Organize media with folders","Organize media with tags","Search for media","Insert media into your Riddle"," Your own media library You can upload your regularly used media files, organize them, and access them quickly again. Upload media into the media library In Riddle Creator, click on the three dots in the top right corner. Go to MEDIA and click on Media library . Drag or click to upload media from your files. For images, you can upload jpg, png, and webp files. Organize media with folders In Riddle Creator, click on the three dots in the top right corner. Go to MEDIA and click on Media library . ADD A FOLDER Go to My Folders . Click on the plus icon next to My Folders , enter a name into the text field, and click on the blue SAVE button. ADD A SUBFOLDER Go to My Folders . Click on the three dots next to the main folder, click on Add folder , enter a name into the text field, and click on the blue SAVE button. RENAME A FOLDER Go to My Folders . Click on the three dots next to the folder whose name you want to change, click on Rename , enter a name into the text field, and click on the blue SAVE button. SET A DEFAULT FOLDER Go to My Folders . Click on the three dots next to the folder you want to make the default and click on Set as default folder . MOVE MEDIA INTO A FOLDER Click on the media, then drag and drop it into the destination folder. Organize media with tags In Riddle Creator, click on the three dots in the top right corner. Go to MEDIA and click on Media library . Go to My Tags . Click on the plus icon next to My Tags . Enter a name into the text field. Click on the blue SAVE button. Search for media In Riddle Creator, click on the three dots in the top right corner. Go to MEDIA and click on Media library . Click in the Search bar, type in what you are looking for, and press . Filter your media by date or name ( ascending or descending ). View your media as tiles or as a list . Insert media into your Riddle In your Riddle, click on Add image, GIF, or audio/video file . Click on YOUR MEDIA . Find your media and click on it.",{"id":922,"path":923,"dir":854,"title":924,"description":925,"keywords":926,"body":927},"content:3.Design:8.Switch to new standard layout.md","/design/switch-to-new-standard-layout","Switch to new standard layout","The new standard layout will automatically be applied to new Riddles you create. For your existing Riddles, you can manually switch the design layout to the new standard. Please note this switch is irreversible.",[]," Switch to new standard layout The new standard layout will automatically be applied to new Riddles you create. For your existing Riddles, you can manually switch the design layout to the new standard. Please note this switch is irreversible. When you open a Riddle, a pop-up will appear. Click on \"I understand\". In your Riddle, go to the Design section on the left. Under Layout , select Standard , and click on Switch to new standard layout . You will see the new standard layout applied to your Riddle straight away on the right. You can make any further color or design under the Palette tab. To revert back to a deprecated layout, go to the Publish section and click on DISCARD CHANGES . Please note: You can only revert back to a deprecated layout before you republish a previously-published Riddle. (Re)publish your Riddle. ",{"id":929,"path":930,"dir":854,"title":931,"description":932,"keywords":933,"body":952},"content:3.Design:9.Rich text editor.md","/design/rich-text-editor","Rich text editor","You can edit text using the rich text editor (RTE) for the following elements in the Creator:",[934,935,936,937,938,939,940,941,942,943,944,945,946,947,948,949,950,951],"Change the heading tag/type","Change the font size","Add typographical emphasis","Apply strikethrough","Add superscript","Add subscript","Change text color","Insert an image","Hyperlink text","Insert an emoji","Add a list","Align text","Add variables","Clear styles","Indent text","Outdent text","Insert a background color","Edit HTML"," Rich text editor You can edit text using the rich text editor (RTE) for the following elements in the Creator: Titles Descriptions Answer content descriptions Result page text Change the heading tag/type Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the heading option box top left and select the heading tag/type you would like. Any text you then write will have this setting. Alternatively, you can apply this setting to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Change the font size Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the px option box and select the font size you would like from the dropdown menu. Any text you then write will have this font size. Alternatively, you can apply this font to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Add typographical emphasis Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the typographical emphasis you would like to apply. There are three options: bold italic underlined Any text you then write will have this setting. Alternatively, you can apply this to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Apply strikethrough Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the S icon. Any text you then write will no have strikethrough. Alternatively, you can apply this to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Add superscript Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the x² icon. Any text you then write will be superscript. Alternatively, you can apply this to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Add subscript Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the x₂ icon. Any text you then write will be subscript. Alternatively, you can apply this to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Change text color Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the T. icon, select the color you would like from the dropdown color menu, and click on APPLY . Any text you then write will be this color. Alternatively, you can apply this color to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Insert an image Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the image icon. Select an image source. There are three to choose from: UPLOAD GOOGLE SEARCH PEXELS For UPLOAD , drap/drop and image to this field, or click to search your files and select an image. For GOOGLE SEARCH and PEXELS , type your search entry into the search field, and select an image. The image will now be in your text field. Hyperlink text Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the 🔗 icon. In the pop-up that appears, enter the URL for the website you'd like the text to link to, disable or enable new tab , and click on SAVE . When enabled, the website will open in a new tab and the tab with the Riddle will remain as it is for the audience. Any text you then write will be linked to this website. Alternatively, you can apply this hyperlink to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following steps two to five. Insert an emoji Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the 🙂 icon. Select an emoji from the dropdown menu, using the search field if necessary. The emoji will now be in your text field. Add a list Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the list type you would like. There are two list options: bullet point list item 1 item 2 item 3 numbered list item 1 item 2 item 3 The list will be in your text field. Click on the same symbol again to stop the list. Align text Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the alignment you would like. There are three alignment options: align left align center align right The alignment will apply to the whole line of text. Add variables Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the ƒ icon and select the variable you would like to add. There are three sorts of variables to choose from: form fields block answers data layer The variable will be in your text field. Clear styles All styles that might be copied with text from other sources such as Microsoft Word are now stripped automatically. However, you can also do this manually. Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the ••• icon top right and select the Tˣ icon. This will strip any previous formatting or styling, such as copied and pasted text from Microsoft Word. Indent text Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the ••• icon top right and select indent . Any text you then write will be indented. Alternatively, you can apply this indent to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Outdent text Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the ••• icon top right and select outdent . Any text you then write will be outdented. Alternatively, you can apply this outdent to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following step two. Insert a background color Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the ••• icon top right and select background color . Select the color you would like from the dropdown color menu, and click on APPLY . Any text you then write will have this background color applied. Alternatively, you can apply this color to existing text by highlighting the text you want to change and following steps two and three. Edit HTML Click on the text field you want to edit. An RTE options bar will appear above the text field. Click on the ••• icon top right and select edit HTML . In the pop-up that appears, you can edit the HTML code for this text field as much as you like. You can also: use CSS classes add tables Click on FORMAT CODE and then SAVE . For more CSS editing, go to our CSS help guides .",{"id":954,"path":955,"dir":854,"title":956,"description":957,"keywords":958,"body":959},"content:3.Design:10.Create buttons.md","/design/create-buttons","Create buttons","In addition to customizing existing buttons, you can also create buttons. You need a Business or Enterprise subscription to do this.",[]," Create buttons In addition to customizing existing buttons, you can also create buttons. You need a Business or Enterprise subscription to do this. Enter the button text you want in the relevant text field for your Riddle. Hyperlink the text to your website in the rich text editor. Open the HTML option in the rich text editor. Locate the starting \u003Cpp> tag surrounding the text and link you added. Replace \u003Cp> with \u003Cp class=\"custombutton\">. Go to the Palette section, click on Customize , scroll down to Custom CSS and click on EDIT . Copy this custom CSS code and paste it into the grey CSS field: .custombutton, .custombutton a:link, .custombutton a:visited, .custombutton a:active {\n background-color: black;\n color: white;\n text-align: center;\n text-decoration: none;\n font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.custombutton {\n width: 49%;\n padding: 15px;\n border-radius: 40px;\n border: 3px black;\n margin: auto;\n}\n Click on FORMAT CODE and SAVE . Change the colors, font weight, border color, and radius in the code to your liking and save again. ",{"id":961,"path":962,"dir":854,"title":963,"description":964,"keywords":965,"body":966},"content:3.Design:11.Change palette via data layer.md","/design/change-palette-via-data-layer","Change palette via data layer","In addition to manual design palette selection and customization, you can also use the data layer to change the palette.",[]," Change palette via data layer In addition to manual design palette selection and customization, you can also use the data layer to change the palette. In your Riddle, go to the Publish section and click on Data layer . Enable Change palette via data layer . Add your palette ID of choice afer the data layer item \"r_p\". Palette name Palette UUID after r_p test i63U Dark mode default:dark Cool default:cool Forest default:forest Rocketship default:rocketship Peachy default:peachy Stagecoach default:stagecoach Accent default:accent Timeless default:timeless",{"id":968,"path":969,"dir":854,"title":970,"description":971,"keywords":972,"body":973},"content:3.Design:12.Use global colors on result page.md","/design/use-global-colors-on-result-page","Use global colors on result page","As well as using any specific color of your choice, you can also use a global color that is already in use elsewhere in your Riddle.",[]," Use global colors on result page As well as using any specific color of your choice, you can also use a global color that is already in use elsewhere in your Riddle. On your result page, click on the result score element and then the edit icon. Click on any color element and select a global color from the list of colors and where they are currently applied on the left. ",{"id":975,"path":976,"dir":977,"title":978,"description":979,"keywords":980,"body":985},"content:4.Publish:0.Your Riddle status.md","/publish/your-riddle-status","publish","Your Riddle's status","There are three statuses for your Riddle.",[981,982,983,984],"Publish your Riddle","Unpublish your Riddle","Discard changes","History"," Your Riddle's status There are three statuses for your Riddle. Draft You have created a Riddle and you can publish it when you're ready. Edited Your changes aren't published yet. When you're ready, you can publish again. An asterisk will appear next to the PUBLISH* button at the top if you have made changes that aren't published yet. Published Your Riddle is live, ready to engage your audience and give you valuable insights. Publish your Riddle In your Riddle, click on Publish at the top and then on Status on the left hand navigation bar. Click on PUBLISH . Unpublish your Riddle In your Riddle, click on Publish at the top and then on Status on the left hand navigation bar. Click on UNPUBLISH . Discard changes In your Riddle, click on Publish at the top and then on Status on the left hand navigation bar. Click on DISCARD CHANGES . History You can see the creation history for each Riddle. the date and time when the Riddle was last published. the date and time when the Riddle was last updated. the date and time when the Riddle was created.",{"id":987,"path":988,"dir":977,"title":989,"description":990,"keywords":991,"body":995},"content:4.Publish:1.Your Riddle landing page.md","/publish/your-riddle-landing-page","Your Riddle landing page","In addition to embedding your Riddle on a website you can also access, play, and share your Riddle via a link. This is the landing page.",[992,993,994],"View your Riddle landing page","Share your Riddle using a QR code","Switch off your Riddle landing page"," Your Riddle landing page In addition to embedding your Riddle on a website you can also access, play, and share your Riddle via a link. This is the landing page. View your Riddle landing page Go to the Publish section. Click on Status . Publish your Riddle and then click on the link next to Landing page . Share your Riddle using a QR code Go to the Publish section. Click on Status . Click on GENERATE QR CODE . Enable or disable Riddle logo . By default, the QR code takes the audience to your Riddle's landing page. If the QR code should take the audience to the page where your Riddle is embedded, enable Custom URL , and enter the URL where your Riddle is embedded. Click on DOWNLOAD QR CODE and paste, upload, or print it wherever you like. Switch off your Riddle landing page Go to the Publish section. Click on Embed / Landing page . Disable Publish on Riddle's landing page .",{"id":997,"path":998,"dir":977,"title":999,"description":1000,"keywords":1001,"body":1004},"content:4.Publish:2.Submit first block via data layer.md","/publish/submit-first-block-via-data-layer","Embed in Emails","You can add the first page of your Riddle into your email or newsletter, or onto social media so that your audience can submit the first block.",[1002,1003],"Try it out","Here's how it works"," Embed in Emails You can add the first page of your Riddle into your email or newsletter, or onto social media so that your audience can submit the first block. The technology behind this is that each choice has a unique link. Once clicked, your audience's vote for a choice is casted via the data layer. Try it out If you want to test how that works, go to [ https://daily-gladiator.com ] https://daily-gladiator.com , and enter your email in the \"Test our \"quiz or poll question in email\" feature.\" form in the right sidebar! Here's how it works Go to the Publish section and click on Data layer . Enable Submit first block via data layer . Enter the URL your Riddle is embedded on in the field or leave this blank if you use the Riddle landing page. For usage on social media, copy the individual links below each answer. For usage in newsletters, copy the html code in the grey box at the bottom of the page and paste it into your email or newsletter. ",{"id":1006,"path":1007,"dir":1008,"title":1009,"description":1010,"keywords":1011,"body":1013},"content:5.Embedding:0.Add domains to your whitelist.md","/embedding/add-domains-to-your-whitelist","embedding","Add domains to your whitelist","Whitelisting is a security feature to prevent people from copying and embedding your Riddles elsewhere. Once a domain is whitelisted, you can embed unlimited Riddles on the site. Only Admins can whitelist domains.",[1012],"Common issues"," Add domains to your whitelist Whitelisting is a security feature to prevent people from copying and embedding your Riddles elsewhere. Once a domain is whitelisted, you can embed unlimited Riddles on the site. Only Admins can whitelist domains. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Add/edit domains . Click on ADD NEW DOMAIN . Enter any domains (e.g. yoursite.com and yourothersite.com) you want to embed your Riddles on and click on the blue CREATE button. Only top-level domains are needed. By whitelisting \"yoursite.com\", for example, \"admin.yoursite.com\" and / or \"yoursite/quiz\" are automatically whitelisted as well. To whitelist staging and dev environments, add an asterisk (*) in front of the domain name. If you already whitelisted \"riddle.com\", for example, you can whitelist \"*.riddle.com” without it counting as a separate domain. Whitelisting \"*.riddle.com\" will whitelist the root domain as well as the wildcard domains. Common issues Sometimes, your website does not send a referrer header. This makes it impossible for Riddle to detect where your content is embedded. In this case, we have the possibility to disable whitelisting for your account. While this impacts the security of your content slightly (your embed code could potentially be copied and put on foreign sites), it will ensure that your content is always running properly.",{"id":1015,"path":1016,"dir":1008,"title":1017,"description":1018,"keywords":1019,"body":1020},"content:5.Embedding:1.Embed your Riddle.md","/embedding/embed-your-riddle","Embed your Riddle","To add your Riddle to your website, you need to embed it.",[]," Embed your Riddle To add your Riddle to your website, you need to embed it. Go to the Publish section and click on Embed / Landing page . Click on GET THE CODE . In the pop-up screen, click on COPY . Go to your website's text editor, and paste your Riddle's embed code.",{"id":1022,"path":1023,"dir":1008,"title":1024,"description":1025,"keywords":1026,"body":1028},"content:5.Embedding:2.Embed a Riddle on Wix.md","/embedding/embed-a-riddle-on-wix","Embed a Riddle on Wix.com","Embedding a Riddle on a WIX site is a special embed case. All Wix sites run under the usrfiles.com domain in the background (even if you have a custom domain name registered). This can cause problems with whitelisting as it is not sufficient to whitelist your domain name.",[1027],"Whitelisting Wix.com custom domain names"," Embed a Riddle on Wix.com Embedding a Riddle on a WIX site is a special embed case. All Wix sites run under the usrfiles.com domain in the background (even if you have a custom domain name registered). This can cause problems with whitelisting as it is not sufficient to whitelist your domain name. Create some room for your Riddle content on your Wix site. You can either make a new empty spot or delete any existing content blocks in your Wix page. Insert the embed code for your Riddle:\n In the left menu, select Add .dIn the left menu, select . Click on More . Click on HTML iFrame . Now that you have an iFrame placeholder on your Wix site: Go to Riddle.com. Go to the Publish section. Click on Embed / Landing page . Click on GET THE CODE . Go back to Wix. Resize your iframe by clicking / dragging the handlebars. Width: Make it as wide as your site. Height: Experiment depending on your quiz, but we recommend trying between 50% and 75% high. Click on Paste code and paste in your Riddle's embed code. You may want to shift things around or drag your HTML iframe height / width controls a bit to give your Riddle enough room. Click on SAVE and then PUBLISH . Check your Riddle on Wix in PUBLISH mode, not PREVIEW . Check the mobile view too. You might need to adjust things here as well. Whitelisting Wix.com custom domain names When you use a custom domain name on Wix, you need to make some changes to whitelisting on Riddle. Make sure Wix is not using your custom domain to serve embedded content. You need to whitelist usrfiles.com , not your own domain name.",{"id":1030,"path":1031,"dir":1008,"title":1032,"description":1033,"keywords":1034,"body":1041},"content:5.Embedding:3. Embed a Riddle on WordPress.md","/embedding/embed-a-riddle-on-wordpress","Embed a Riddle on WordPress","You can embed a Riddle on WordPress, either with our WordPress plugin or without.",[1035,1036,1037,1038,1039,1040],"Embed Riddle with plugin","Embed Riddle without plugin","Gutenberg Block Editor","Visual Composer","Elementor","Any other page builder"," Embed a Riddle on WordPress You can embed a Riddle on WordPress, either with our WordPress plugin or without. Embed Riddle with plugin The Riddle plugin in WordPress means you can embed Riddles in WordPress directly without having to go into Riddle. Download our WordPress plugin . Go to the Riddle Plugin in WordPress and click on Authenticate . Select a project. Confirm the authorization. Click on Get shortcode next to the Riddle you want to embed. Click on COPY SHORTCODE in the pop-up. Paste the shortcode into the placeholder in WordPress. To disconnect the integration, go to the Riddle Plugin in Wordpress and click on Disconnect . Please note: If you are using Gutenberg or any other editor like Fusion from Avada or the classic editor, our shortcode will always work. Embed Riddle without plugin You can also use our standard HTML embed codes without the plugin. Add a custom HTML block to your page in WordPress. Paste the Riddle embed code. Gutenberg Block Editor Every WordPress installation comes with the Gutenberg Block Editor installed. Riddle.com's WordPress Plugin supports Gutenberg blocks (version 4.0 or higher). In this first Gutenberg release, you can easily add your Riddles as a Gutenberg block by choosing the \"Riddle\" block type and then either: In your WordPress page, click on the + symbol, search for Riddle and click on the Riddle image. Enter the Riddle URL, the shortcode, or Riddle ID. The Riddle will appear directly. Visual Composer Visual Composer comes as the page builder of choice with many popular themes like TagDiv. To add the Riddle embed code there, add a Raw HTML Block and then paste the Riddle embed code. Elementor When using Elementor, add the widget to your page and then paste the Riddle embed code Any other page builder Every page builder will have a similar element called HTML, External HTML, external code or similar. Please make sure to always paste the Riddle embed code as raw HTML instead of adding it to a rich text editor.",{"id":1043,"path":1044,"dir":1008,"title":1045,"description":1046,"keywords":1047,"body":1048},"content:5.Embedding:4.Embed a Riddle on Typo 3.md","/embedding/embed-a-riddle-on-typo-3","Embed a Riddle on Typo 3","Embedding a Riddle on a Typo 3 site is a special embed case.",[]," Embed a Riddle on Typo 3 Embedding a Riddle on a Typo 3 site is a special embed case. Publish your Riddle. In Typo 3, create a new content element . Click on Special elements > Plain HTML . In Riddle, go to the Publish section. Click on Embed / Landing page . Click on GET THE CODE and then COPY . Paste the code in the HTML Code section in Typo 3. Click on SAVE and then preview your Riddle on the site. You may want to shift things around or drag your HTML iframe height / width controls.",{"id":1050,"path":1051,"dir":1008,"title":1052,"description":1053,"keywords":1054,"body":1055},"content:5.Embedding:5.Embed advanced.md","/embedding/embed-advanced","Embed advanced","You can set up and control advanced settings for your Riddle embed.",[]," Embed advanced You can set up and control advanced settings for your Riddle embed. Go to the Publish section and click on Embed / Landing page . Click on ADVANCED . Enable Boost your SEO / Google ranking to get more traffic to your site. Your embed code will include all the text from your Riddle, including questions, answers, and explanations. This will be readable by Google and will help boost your site's SEO ranking. Enable Auto scroll to change the display of your Riddle. Riddles normally jump back to the top after each question. If this is not working for your website, you can try this option. Enable Use a 'sticky' header on your site if your Riddle appears under a header bar on your site. This ensures your Riddle is pushed down that amount so it will always appear below it and be fully visible to your audience. You can then enter a height into the Auto scroll offset field. We recommend starting with 150px and adjusting as needed. Or you can also measure the height of your menu bar in pixels. Chrome has some free extensions like this one . Alternatively, start with 150px and adjust as needed. Change the Max. width if you want to make your Riddle wider or narrower on the site where it is embedded. We recommend 640px. Our standard embed code will resize automatically for smartphones and tablets. For example, if you set your max width to 1200px (almost full page), your Riddle will still resize automatically to smaller screens. Please note: Resizing only works with JavaScript and CSS enabled. Enable Set fixed height if you want to make your Riddle taller or shorter on the site where it is embedded. You can then enter an iframe height and select the unit from the dropdown menu. Enable Lazy load images to load images 'just in time' before they reach your audience. When it is disabled, all your Riddle images are loaded before letting your audience start the Riddle. Enable Lazy load Riddle to only load your Riddle when it is actually visible to your audience (recommended). This speeds up your page's load times. When it is disabled, the Riddle loads every time the page loads. Enable No JavaScript to removed JavaScript from our embed code. Riddle embed codes work in 99% of all web tools but this can help if you are still having issues. The downside is your Riddle will not resize automatically to smaller screens. Enter the height and select the unit from the dropdown menu. Enable No CSS to disable CSS being embedded. Click on COPY and re-embed your Riddle. Riddles normally update automatically but this feature will change your original embed settings so you need to paste it again.",{"id":1057,"path":1058,"dir":1008,"title":1059,"description":9,"keywords":1060,"body":1065},"content:5.Embedding:6.Embed troubleshooting.md","/embedding/embed-troubleshooting","Embed troubleshooting",[1061,1062,1063,1064],"The Riddle is not loading. I only see the load animation.","My Riddle is too big/too small.","The page scrolls up and down when answers are selected.","My embedded Riddle isn't adopting the changes I've made in the Creator"," Embed troubleshooting The Riddle is not loading. I only see the load animation. If you have a security plugin installed, disable the security plugin briefly and try again. If the Riddle is loading now, adjust your security settings to allow the embedding of third party iframes. If you are running Smush from WPMU DEV, make sure to disable lazy loading for iframes. If you are running other optimization tools, disable them briefly and check if Riddle loads. If it loads without that tool enabled, find out if your optimization tool can bypass iframes. My Riddle is too big/too small. Riddles will try to fit into the container where you placed the embed code. When using site builders that allow you to place containers on your site, make sure to fit the Riddle into a container that has the desired width. If you want a full screen Riddle, change the width to 100% before you generate the embed code. Go to the Publish section and click on Embed / Landing page . Click on ADVANCED . Change the Max. width to 100%. COPY the embed code and paste it into your website publisher again. The page scrolls up and down when answers are selected. By default, Riddles have auto scroll enabled. This provides a good user experience if the Riddle has a lot of answer options for example. However, in some WordPress environments, auto scroll is not wanted. Disable Auto scroll . When changing the auto scroll setting (or any other publish setting), make sure to replace the embed code on your site with the newly generated code after making that change. Go to the Publish section and click on Embed / Landing page . Click on ADVANCED . Disable Auto scroll . COPY the embed code and paste it into your website publisher again. My embedded Riddle isn't adopting the changes I've made in the Creator If you make changes in the Creator, publish your Riddle again and the Riddle will automatically update wherever it is embedded or linked. If you make changes in Embed > Advanced, the Riddle code changes, which means you need to recopy and paste the code. If you are using the WordPress plugin, the most recent version of the embed code is loaded via the API when it is first placed. If the embed code changes, the short code will also update but not immediately. The plugin checks if there is a new version of the embed code once every 24 hours and if there is, it updates the WordPress database accordingly.",{"id":1067,"path":1068,"dir":1008,"title":1069,"description":1070,"keywords":1071,"body":1072},"content:5.Embedding:7.Make your Riddle landing page full-screen.md","/embedding/make-your-riddle-landing-page-full-screen","Make your Riddle landing page full screen","As an alternative to the Riddle iFrame, you can also make your Riddle landing page full screen.",[]," Make your Riddle landing page full screen As an alternative to the Riddle iFrame, you can also make your Riddle landing page full screen. Go to the Publish section and click on Embed / Landing page . Enable Full-screen layout on landing page . Go to the Publish section, publish your Riddle again, and click on the landing page link to view the full-screen version of your Riddle landing page. ",{"id":1074,"path":1075,"dir":1076,"title":1077,"description":9,"keywords":1078,"body":1086},"content:6.Settings:0.General settings.md","/settings/general-settings","settings","General settings",[1079,1080,1081,1082,1083,1084,1085],"Enable pagination","Advance automatically from one block to the next","Change the media ratio","Change the language","Customize buttons","Riddle open/closed","Remember user via cookies"," General settings Enable pagination Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Enable Pagination to control the page and progress display. Enable # of pages to display the total number of pages to the audience while doing the Riddle. Enable Progress bar to display how far through the Riddle the audience is. Enable Only show on question blocks to limit the page numbers / progress bar to the blocks that contain questions. Enable Display \"Back\" button to allow your audience to go back to the previous question via a backward arrow symbol \u003C in the top left corner of the Riddle. Advance automatically from one block to the next Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Enable Auto advance to automatically go from one question to the answer explanation or next question. Enable \" Choose\" button so your audience can change their answers before submitting. This overwrites auto advance where applicable. Change the media ratio Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Go to Default media ratio and select a ratio for images and other media. You can always change this within each individual block. Change the language Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Go to Language to set the language for your Riddle. Customize buttons Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Enable Customize button text to change what specific buttons say. You can enter your own text in the Write something fields for the following buttons: Choose Choose again I give up Start Next Skip Play again Submit and continue Form skip Riddle open/closed Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Your Riddle is open by default. To close the Riddle, disable Your Riddle is open so that your audience can participate in your Riddle. To limit when your Riddle is open, enable Set opening date and/or Set closing date and choose a local date and time. Enable Show result page after closing date and select result page from the dropdown menu so that a specific result page appears for your audience following the closing date (for a poll/survey only). Remember user via cookies This option allows the Riddle to write data into the local storage of your audience's browser, meaning they don't have to input their name again if in the website history. You might have to adapt your website's cookie statement. This setting is only possible if your Riddle is embedded on your website, not if it is being shared via a Riddle landing page. Remember user does not work in apps because they do not support local storage. Go to the Settings section and click on General: Global controls . Enable Remember users via cookies . To enable more controls, enable the button next to If this option is ON . Enable Ask users for permission to show the audience a checkbox which they can check to store data in their local storage and use it to fill out future forms. Enable Auto submit & skip forms when user is remembered to skip forms completely for those who have their data stored in their local storage so they are automatically taken to the next Riddle block. ",{"id":1088,"path":1089,"dir":1076,"title":1090,"description":1091,"keywords":1092,"body":1096},"content:6.Settings:1.Branding.md","/settings/branding","Branding","Add a brand logo and footer.",[1093,1094,1095],"Remove Riddle branding","Add footer branding","Add footer text"," Branding Add a brand logo and footer. Remove Riddle branding Go to the Settings section and click on Branding: Your logo, ads, and footer . Disable Display Riddle branding if you don't want the Riddle logo and brand name to appear under the Riddle. You need a Riddle Pro subscription or higher to do this. Add footer branding Go to the Settings section and click on Branding: Your logo, ads, and footer . Select 'Add your logo' from the dropdown menu, click on Add image to Drag/drop media or click to search your files , and select the image you want as your logo. This is possible with Pro, Business, and Enterprise subscriptions. Select the logo orientation , width , and position , and enter the URL link where you want your audience to go when they click on the logo. Add footer text Go to the Settings section and click on Branding: Your logo, ads, and footer . Go to Footer text to enter text that should appear at the bottom of the first block. Enable Display on all blocks if you would like the footer to appear on every block in the Riddle. ",{"id":1098,"path":1099,"dir":1076,"title":453,"description":1100,"keywords":1101,"body":1104},"content:6.Settings:2.Monetization.md","/settings/monetization","Leverage the strong engagement of your Riddles by serving your own ads above or below your Riddles. Or use our ad blocks to display video or banner interstitial ads.",[1102,1103],"Add ad slots","Display ads above/below your Riddle"," Monetization Leverage the strong engagement of your Riddles by serving your own ads above or below your Riddles. Or use our ad blocks to display video or banner interstitial ads. Add ad slots You can configure ad slots for a project to use again and again in any Riddle in that project. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects . Click on EDIT next to the project you would like to work on. Click on Ad Slots and enter the Slot , Head , Code , and Variables . Click on Add more ad slots and repeat step 3 for as many ad slots as you like. Click on SAVE . You can now insert an ad slot into a Riddle or display ads above/below your Riddle. Display ads above/below your Riddle As well as having an ad inside your Riddle, you can also show content above or below your Riddle. You need a Riddle Business subscription or higher to do this. Go to the Settings section and click on Monetization: Display ads . Enable Display ads above/below your Riddle . Enable Show an ad below your Riddle and/or Show an ad above your Riddle . You can now either: Enter the iframe URL and enter the height (in px) OR Insert a project ad by enabling Project ad .",{"id":1106,"path":1107,"dir":1076,"title":1108,"description":1109,"keywords":1110,"body":1115},"content:6.Settings:3.Timer.md","/settings/timer","Timer","You can set time limits in your Riddle.",[1111,1112,1113,1114],"Enable a timer for the Riddle","Enable a timer for each block","Create a countdown","What happens when timers run out?"," Timer You can set time limits in your Riddle. Enable a timer for the Riddle Go to the Settings section and click on Timer: Block or Riddle time limits . Enable Riddle timer to have a countdown that runs from the moment your audience starts the Riddle and is for the entire Riddle. Enable Pause timer on non-question blocks to stop the timer on blocks that don't count towards the score. This gives the audience as much time as they need to complete a content block. Select a time limit . The default is 30 seconds. Select a timer shape from the dropdown menu. You can choose between a bar and a circle. Select a time format from the dropdown menu. Enter the number of seconds at which you want a warning to appear in the Warning at field. If you do not want a warning, enter 0. Enable Auto pause to automatically stop the timer in between blocks. This means that if your audience is experiencing slower or faster internet, the timer is not affected and will continue when the next block has fully loaded. Enable a timer for each block Go to the Settings section and click on Timer: Block or Riddle time limits . Enable Block timer to have a countdown that runs from the moment your audience starts the specific block and is for that block only. Select a time limit . The default is 30 seconds. Select a timer shape from the dropdown menu. You can choose between a bar and a circle. Select a time format from the dropdown menu. Enter the number of seconds at which you want a warning to appear in the Warning at field. If you do not want a warning, enter 0. Enable Individual times to see the timers for each content block. The default is 30 seconds. Change the number of seconds for any of the blocks as needed using the up and down arrows or by entering the number of seconds. Create a countdown Go to the Settings section and click on Timer: Block or Riddle time limits . Enable Countdown timer (in seconds) to add a countdown before the Riddle starts. Use the up/down arrows or enter the number of seconds. What happens when timers run out? When a block timer expires, the block is automatically submitted with 0 points, and the Riddle proceeds to the next block.\nIn the rare case that the next block cannot be determined due to branching logic constraints, the Riddle will restart. When the Riddle timer expires, your audience sees an error message prompting them to restart the quiz.\nPoints earned up to that point are not saved. Related articles: General settings Quiz right and wrong answers Block results",{"id":1117,"path":1118,"dir":1076,"title":1119,"description":1120,"keywords":1121,"body":1122},"content:6.Settings:4.Block results.md","/settings/block-results","Block results","You can configure what audience statistics appear for your audience after completing each block.",[]," Block results You can configure what audience statistics appear for your audience after completing each block. Go to the Settings section and click on Block results: Configure display . Enable Display audience totals after each answer . Enable Display percentages for the audience to see how many people chose each answer as a percentage. Enable Display number of participants for the audience to see how many people chose each answer as a whole number. Enable Display total votes for the audience to see the total number of votes cast so far. Enable Reveal results later to make results appear at a later date and/or time (poll only). You can then: Set up a Reveal date using the calendar icon. Add 'reveal results later' text .",{"id":1124,"path":1125,"dir":1076,"title":1126,"description":9,"keywords":1127,"body":1134},"content:6.Settings:5.Security.md","/settings/security","Security",[1128,1129,1130,1131,1132,1133],"Plays/votes per browser","Play again","Enable IP limit","Enable one vote per lead-ID","Enable spam filter for emails","Privacy opt-ins"," Security Plays/votes per browser Limit how many times someone can play or vote. If you have cookies disabled, the One vote per browser feature does not work as it requires the local storage. When cookies are disabled, use the IP limit instead, which is handled in our backend without cookies. One vote per browser does not work in apps because they do not support local storage. Go to the Settings section and click on Security: Limits and privacy . Enable One play/vote per browser to limit your audience to take a Riddle or vote once per browser. Play again Show your audience a \"Play again\" button. Go to the Settings section and click on Security: Limits and privacy . Enable the \"Play again\" button . This lets your audience retake the Riddle as many times as they like. Enable IP limit Limit how many votes can come from the same IP address. Go to the Settings section and click on Security: Limits and privacy . Enable IP limit . This makes it harder for bots and scripts to affect your poll. Select a time interval for your IP limit from the dropdown menu. Enter the # of tries per period that can come from a single IP address. We recommend 10 based on the use case that people in the same office who share the same IP address can all vote. This does NOT mean each poll taker can take your poll a set number of times (e.g. \"4 times per user\"). That is still capped at once per browser. Please note: We never store the actual IP addresses of your audience on our servers. Riddle is an EU-based, GDPR-compliant quiz maker so we don't store personal information like this. Find out more about Riddle.com's privacy policy here . Enable one vote per lead-ID Restricting votes by lead identifier adds another layer of security to your polls and quizzes. It prevents people from entering twice and cannot be bypassed in the same way one vote per browser can. Only complete, verified submissions are saved. Incomplete or duplicate attempts are not recorded in the statistics, guaranteeing clean, unmanipulated data. The only statistic that may increase is view count, but not starts or completions. Go to the Settings section and click on Security: Limits and privacy . Enable One vote per Lead-ID . Go to the Publish section and click on Save and connect data . Select a data variable from the Lead identifier dropdown menu, such as phone or email. Someone reusing this lead identifier will be blocked at verification. Enable spam filter for emails Block disposable or temporary email addresses from being entered in forms. Go to the Settings section and click on Security: Limits and privacy . Enable Spam filter for emails . Email addresses from GitHub's open source disposable email domains list will then be blocked. Your audience will then be asked to use a trusted email address instead. Privacy opt-ins Add consent boxes for your audience to click on before viewing the content on these sites. Go to the Settings section and click on Security: Limits and privacy . Enable Privacy Opt-ins (YouTube, Vimeo, X) . This is to add another step of consent because YouTube, Vimeo, and X add cookies to any of their content that is embedded in your Riddle. Enter a message you want to appear in the Privacy text fields (optional). Enter your preferred text into the Privacy text button field for what the button itself should say. ",{"id":1136,"path":1137,"dir":1076,"title":1138,"description":1139,"keywords":1140,"body":1141},"content:6.Settings:6.Quiz right and wrong answers.md","/settings/quiz-right-and-wrong-answers","Quiz right and wrong answers","There are quiz-specific settings that only appear in the quiz format Riddle.",[]," Quiz right and wrong answers There are quiz-specific settings that only appear in the quiz format Riddle. Go to the Settings section and click on Quiz: Right/wrong answer settings . Enable the Right/wrong indicators for your audience to see their right and wrong answers marked after they have given their answer and then select one or more of the options below. Enable Visual indicators to see a tick or a cross for correct and incorrect answers respectively displayed on the right of the answers. Enable Display visuals briefly to make the indicators appear only briefly. Enable Right/wrong message for the audience to see a 'Right' button with a tick and a 'Wrong' button with a cross pop up below the answers following a correct and wrong answer respectively. Enable Display user's current score to show the score your audience achieved up to the current block.\nEnabling this option will add a visualization to the Riddle's pagination.\nYou can choose to: Show/hide it on the result page Show it only on question blocks (not forms or other content blocks) Show score as total points or percentage of total",{"id":1143,"path":1144,"dir":1076,"title":1145,"description":1146,"keywords":1147,"body":1150},"content:6.Settings:7.Results.md","/settings/results","Results","These are personality quiz-specific settings that only appear in the personality quiz format Riddle.",[1148,1149],"Configure personality result calculation","Configure attribute result calculation"," Results These are personality quiz-specific settings that only appear in the personality quiz format Riddle. Configure personality result calculation Go to the Settings section and click on Results: Personality and attribute calculation . Go to Personality result calculation based on to select how the personality result should be calculated. There are two options: Total points achieved across all personalities Points scored for that result are divided by the total points scored for all results to give you a proportional score across the personalities. The max. points possible for each personality Each result is calculated independently. Points scored for that result are divided by the maximum possible points for that result to give you a score. Configure attribute result calculation Go to the Settings section and click on Results: Personality and attribute calculation . Go to Attribute result calculation based on to select how the attribute results (if you are using attributes) should be calculated. Select one of the two options: Total points achieved across all attributes Points scored for that result are divided by the total points scored for all results to give you a proportional score across the attributes. The max. points possible for each attribute Each result is calculated independently. Points scored for that result are divided by the maximum possible points for that result to give you a score.",{"id":1152,"path":1153,"dir":1076,"title":1154,"description":1155,"keywords":1156,"body":1164},"content:6.Settings:8.Enhance security.md","/settings/enhance-security","Enhance security","Riddle has an extensive range of security features and settings and to optimise each of your Riddle's security. Please note, however, that technology is changing incredibly quickly and no Riddle can ever be completely hacker-proof. Here are a few recommendations.",[1157,1158,1159,1160,1161,1162,1163],"Enable one vote per browser","Limit IP addresses","Enable one vote per lead identifier","Block spam emails","Add a CAPTCHA block","Use double opt-in (DOI) or one time passwords (OTP)","Backend security systems"," Enhance security Riddle has an extensive range of security features and settings and to optimise each of your Riddle's security. Please note, however, that technology is changing incredibly quickly and no Riddle can ever be completely hacker-proof. Here are a few recommendations. Enable one vote per browser This is the easiest to implement, and simply limits people to one vote per browser to discourage casual cheating. However, if a person opens an incognito browser or clears their cookies, they can vote again once more. Follow the steps in the one vote per browser help guide . Limit IP addresses You can also limit the number of times people can take a Riddle (by IP address). We recommend at least 5, because offices will share an IP address so multiple people could take the same Riddle. Follow the steps in the IP limit help guide . Please note: We never store the actual IP addresses of your audience on our servers. Instead, we work with hash values. Riddle is an EU-based, GDPR-compliant quiz maker so we don't store personal information like this. Find out more about  Riddle.com's privacy policy . Enable one vote per lead identifier You can restrict votes by lead identifier to prevent people from entering twice. This cannot be bypassed in the same way one vote per browser can. Only complete, verified submissions are saved. Incomplete or duplicate attempts are not recorded in the statistics, guaranteeing clean, unmanipulated data. The only statistic that may increase is view count, but not starts or completions. If this option is ON, stats will only be saved if your audience completes the Riddle successfully. Follow the steps in the one vote per lead identifier help guide . Block spam emails Spam blocking means your audience trying to submit forms with disposable or temporary emails will be blocked and asked to use a trusted email address. We use this open-source list from GitHub: https://github.com/disposable-email-domains/disposable-email-domains . Follow the steps in the block spam emails guide . Add a CAPTCHA block You can add our new CAPTCHA block as part of a form. Only those who complete the CAPTCHA will have their votes counted. We support three methods: Riddle, Google reCAPTCHA v3, and Cloudflare Turnstile. Follow the steps in the CAPTCHA help guide . Use double opt-in (DOI) or one time passwords (OTP) Riddle also supports DOI/OTP, which sends a link or a code to your audience after voting. Votes are only counted for people who click the DOI link or enter the OTP code. Follow the steps in the DOI help guide . All listed security options can also be combined with each other to further improve security. Many of our customers enable “One vote per browser” for polls by default. If more security is required, OTP or CAPTCHA can be added. For even higher security requirements, you can enable the IP limit in addition to these two options. Backend security systems Riddle uses a tightly meshed client-server connection. All validations and voting are done on the server side, which makes it much easier to detect and block false messages or fraudulent votes. Riddle’s DevOps teams also run a series of automated protections in the background, designed to detect and prevent automated attacks, such as monitoring for conspicuous numbers of simultaneous connections or a particularly large number of messages from a single IP address. Related articles: General settings",{"id":1166,"path":1167,"dir":1168,"title":1169,"description":1170,"keywords":1171,"body":1174},"content:7.Leads:0.Intro to lead generation.md","/leads/intro-to-lead-generation","leads","Intro to lead generation","You can collect, save, and send leads with any Riddle you make.",[1172,1173],"How lead generation works","Set up lead generation"," Intro to lead generation You can collect, save, and send leads with any Riddle you make. How lead generation works Create You add a lead block to your Riddle. Collect Your audience enters their data when they play the Riddle. This data is saved in Riddle by default (you can disable this). You can also send leads directly to your external lead tool. Connect You can contact your leads. Set up lead generation Add a form (lead) block to your Riddle. Set up double opt-in (DOI) confirmation if needed or wanted for your privacy regulations. Lead information and individual responses are stored on Riddle's GDPR-compliant servers. The data is saved to Riddle by default. To disable this, go to the Publish step and click on Save and connect data . Disable the Save w/Riddle button. We store individual answers and responses: for polls / surveys for personality quizzes / quizzes if a form block is included. Choose an integration: Google Sheets Mailchimp AWeber ActiveCampaign Webhook Zapier Brevo Salesforce ApiX-Drive Analyze your leads . Related articles: Send automated emails Pick a winner Set up DOI",{"id":1176,"path":1177,"dir":1168,"title":1178,"description":1179,"keywords":1180,"body":1181},"content:7.Leads:1.Send leads to Google Sheets.md","/leads/send-leads-to-google-sheets","Send leads to Google Sheets","You can automatically send Riddle leads and responses to Google Sheets.",[]," Send leads to Google Sheets You can automatically send Riddle leads and responses to Google Sheets. Once the setup is completed as below, you do not need to do anything else. Here's a short video guide on how connect your Riddle to Google Sheets: Go to the Publish section and click on Save and connect data . Go to Add integrations . Click on the blue ADD button next to Google Sheets. In the Google Drive window that appears, choose a Google account to connect to Riddle. Click on Allow to authorize Google to connect with your Riddle account. Riddle automatically creates a sheet in your Google Docs. It will have a title like Riddle: 35QoMRx7 (Riddle + \u003Cyour Riddle's ID>). Riddle also automatically sends a test lead to your Google Sheet. In the pop-up window that appears in Riddle, click on CONTINUE or click on SEND to test the integration again.",{"id":1183,"path":1184,"dir":1168,"title":1185,"description":1186,"keywords":1187,"body":1190},"content:7.Leads:2.Send leads to AWeber.md","/leads/send-leads-to-aweber","Send leads to AWeber","Send personalized follow-up messages via AWeber that are both relevant and specific to each member of your audience based on their Riddle results.",[1188,1189],"Connect AWeber to Riddle","Next steps in AWeber"," Send leads to AWeber Send personalized follow-up messages via AWeber that are both relevant and specific to each member of your audience based on their Riddle results. Connect AWeber to Riddle Create a Riddle. Add a lead generation form by clicking on ADD A FORM (LEAD) BLOCK and selecting the form you want. You must include a name and email form for the AWeber connection to work. Create custom fields in AWeber such as 'Overall quiz result' (e.g. \"You're a collaborative manager\"), 'Quiz score' (e.g. 6 points), and 'Answers to each question'. Go to the PUBLISH step and click on Save and connect data. Click on ADD next to AWeber. In the pop-up that appears, log in to authenticate your AWeber account. Select the information you want for each AWeber field under Riddle data (e.g. Answer) and your lead form (name, email, etc.). As you map the different variables to your AWeber lead fields, a wand icon appears next to some fields. These are dynamic, not standard fixed fields, and each Riddle taker's data will depend on their Riddle results. For example, in a personality test, 'Winning Personality Title' would be the audience member's top personality result, such as 'You're a collaborator!'. Click on SYNC . In AWeber, select a list and tag users under Tags (optional). You can also choose to add tags to all your leads. Add a ‘Riddle quiz leads’ tag to help you keep track inside AWeber. Test your AWeber / Riddle connection before sharing with your audience. Publish and take your quiz and fill in your lead form using a completely new email address (AWeber won’t add a previously used email). Click on the double opt-in link in your email. Check the lead appears and all custom fields and tags are working properly. Next steps in AWeber Now you can also set up automated replies in AWeber .",{"id":1192,"path":1193,"dir":1168,"title":1194,"description":1195,"keywords":1196,"body":1199},"content:7.Leads:3.Send leads to ActiveCampaign.md","/leads/send-leads-to-activecampaign","Send leads to ActiveCampaign","Send personalized follow-up messages via ActiveCampaign that are both relevant and specific to each member of your audience based on their Riddle results.",[1197,1198],"Connect ActiveCampaign to Riddle","Next steps in ActiveCampaign"," Send leads to ActiveCampaign Send personalized follow-up messages via ActiveCampaign that are both relevant and specific to each member of your audience based on their Riddle results. Connect ActiveCampaign to Riddle Create a Riddle. Add a lead generation form by clicking on ADD A FORM (LEAD) BLOCK and selecting the form you want. You must include a name and email form for the connection to work. Create custom fields in ActiveCampaign such as 'Overall quiz result' (e.g. \"You're a collaborative manager\"), 'Quiz score' (e.g. 6 points), and 'Answers to each question'. Go to the PUBLISH step and click on Save and connect data. Click on ADD next to ActiveCampaign. In the pop-up that appears, enter the API URL and API Key, both of which you can find in ActiveCampaign under Settings --> Developer --> API access, and then click on CONTINUE . Select the information you want for each ActiveCampaign field under Riddle data (e.g. Answer) and your lead form (name, email, etc.). As you map the different variables to your ActiveCampaign lead fields, a wand icon appears next to some fields. These are dynamic, not standard fixed fields, and each Riddle taker's data will depend on their Riddle results. For example, in a personality test, 'Winning Personality Title' would be the audience member's top personality result, such as 'You're a collaborator!'. Click on SYNC . In ActiveCampaign, select a list and tag users under Tags (optional). You can also choose to add tags to all your leads. Add a ‘Riddle quiz leads’ tag to help you keep track inside ActiveCampaign. Test your ActiveCampaign / Riddle connection before sharing with your audience. Publish and take your quiz and fill in your lead form using a completely new email address (ActiveCampaign won’t add a previously used email). Click on the double opt-in link in your email. Check the lead appears and all custom fields and tags are working properly. Next steps in ActiveCampaign Now you can also set up automated replies in ActiveCampaign .",{"id":1201,"path":1202,"dir":1168,"title":1203,"description":1204,"keywords":1205,"body":1208},"content:7.Leads:4.Send leads to a webhook.md","/leads/send-leads-to-a-webhook","Send leads to a webhook","You can send your Riddle leads and responses automatically to your marketing software or data warehouse for each person who completes your lead generation form. Here's some more information about webhooks and APIs.",[1206,1207],"Add a webhook","Process the webhook"," Send leads to a webhook You can send your Riddle leads and responses automatically to your marketing software or data warehouse for each person who completes your lead generation form. Here's some more information about webhooks and APIs . Add a webhook Create a Riddle that includes at least one lead block. Set up a URL for a webhook on your web server. For testing purposes we recommend creating a free webhook on https://webhook.site as this will allow you to inspect the data Riddle sends to the webhook. In Riddle, go to PUBLISH and click on Save and connect data . Under Add integrations , find Webhook , and click on ADD . Enter the URL of your webhook endpoint into the Webhook URL field and click on CONTINUE . A test lead will be sent automatically but you can retest by clicking on SEND . Click on CONTINUE . The test lead will appear on your webhook site. Play your published Riddle. You will see all the Riddle events on your test webhook and, when then in use, on your server. Here is the payload using our example Riddle: {\n \"uniqueId\": \"613361996f3862696d2b60506e756144689e6ebf6a5c666f6127bf8b4f5e9d0ae4\",\n \"riddleId\": \"4kTPnvQ3\",\n \"confirmed\": true,\n \"identifier\": \"charlotte@riddle.com\",\n \"version\": 3,\n \"createdAt\": \"2024-04-25 08:54:43\",\n \"data\": {\n \"riddle\": [\n {\n \"title\": \"What do you enjoy most?\",\n \"blockId\": 3,\n \"value\": [\n \"Type the sport you enjoy most.\"\n ]\n },\n {\n \"title\": \"What was the last event you went to as a spectator?\",\n \"blockId\": 7,\n \"value\": [\n \"A running event\"\n ]\n },\n {\n \"title\": \"What was the last event you participated in?\",\n \"blockId\": 5,\n \"value\": [\n \"A running event\"\n ]\n }\n ],\n \"form\": [\n {\n \"title\": \"Name\",\n \"blockId\": 6,\n \"fieldId\": 0,\n \"value\": \"Charlotte\"\n },\n {\n \"title\": \"Email\",\n \"blockId\": 6,\n \"fieldId\": 1,\n \"value\": \"charlotte@riddle.com\"\n },\n {\n \"title\": \"Checkbox\",\n \"blockId\": 6,\n \"fieldId\": 2,\n \"value\": true\n }\n ],\n \"time\": 36696,\n \"result\": {\n \"score\": 0,\n \"maxScore\": 0,\n \"blockId\": 1,\n \"title\": \"Thanks for sharing.\"\n }\n }\n}\n When you add a webhook, you automatically get a signature key. This key is then used when a webhook comes in. In Riddle.com's backend, a hash with the response content and the signature key are created. The point of this is that the same happens in the webhook code, i.e. you hash the received content with your own signature key. If the hashes match then it comes from Riddle.com. Process the webhook Please note that the code below is very specific to a Riddle with one question and one form field. You need to adjust your code to capture the data from your Riddle. By using https://webhook.site you will get a good overview of all the data your Riddle sends to the webhook. ::riddle-code-example\n\n#php\n```php\n\u003C?php\n\n// read the raw payload from the request\n$rawPayload = file_get_contents('php://input');\n\nif (!$rawPayload) {\n http_response_code(400);\n die('No payload received');\n}\n\nfile_put_contents(__DIR__.'/payload.json', $rawPayload); // optional: save the payload to a file for debugging\n\n// now, let's decode the payload\n$payload = json_decode($rawPayload, true);\n\n// ======\n// == Extract data points from the payload\n\n// basic information about the lead itself\n$uniqueId = $payload['uniqueId'];\n$riddleId = $payload['riddleId'];\n$identifier = $payload['identifier'];\n$version = $payload['version'];\n$createdAt = $payload['createdAt'];\n\n// information about the Riddle\n$riddleTitle = $payload['data']['riddle'][0]['title'];\n$riddleBlockId = $payload['data']['riddle'][0]['blockId'];\n$riddleValue = $payload['data']['riddle'][0]['value'][0];\n\n// information about the form; in our case we only have *ONE* form field.\n$formTitle = $payload['data']['form'][0]['title'];\n$formBlockId = $payload['data']['form'][0]['blockId'];\n$formFieldId = $payload['data']['form'][0]['fieldId'];\n$formValue = $payload['data']['form'][0]['value'];\n\n// information about the result\n$resultBlockId = $payload['data']['result']['blockId'];\n$resultTitle = $payload['data']['result']['title'];\n$resultScore = $payload['data']['result']['score'];\n$resultMaxScore = $payload['data']['result']['maxScore'];\n\n// NOW: do whatever you want with the data, for example save it to a MySQL database\n$sql = \"INSERT INTO [...]\";\n```\n #js\n```js\nconst http = require(\"http\");\n\nconst requestListener = function (req, res) {\n const methodType = req.method.toUpperCase();\n\n if (methodType == \"POST\") {\n getRequestBodyAndGenerateResponse(req, res, postMethodHandler);\n }\n\n res.writeHead(200);\n res.end();\n};\n\nconst getRequestBodyAndGenerateResponse = (req, res, callback) => {\n let body = \"\";\n req.on(\"data\", (chunk) => {\n body += chunk.toString();\n });\n req.on(\"end\", () => {\n callback(res, JSON.parse(body));\n });\n};\n\nconst postMethodHandler = (res, body) => {\n try {\n const reqBody = body;\n console.log(\"reqBody: \", reqBody);\n parseRiddleWebhookData(reqBody);\n res.writeHead(200);\n res.end();\n } catch (err) {\n console.error(err);\n res.writeHead(400);\n res.end();\n }\n};\n\nconst parseRiddleWebhookData = (riddleResponse) => {\n const uniqueId = riddleResponse.uniqueId;\n const riddleId = riddleResponse.riddleId;\n const confirmed = riddleResponse.confirmed;\n const identifier = riddleResponse.identifier; // can be null\n const version = riddleResponse.version;\n const createdAt = riddleResponse.createdAt;\n\n console.log(\"uniqueId: \", uniqueId);\n console.log(\"riddleId: \", riddleId);\n console.log(\"confirmed: \", confirmed);\n console.log(\"identifier: \", identifier);\n console.log(\"version: \", version);\n console.log(\"createdAt: \", createdAt);\n\n const data = riddleResponse.data; // array with question & answer data\n processRiddleBlockData(data.riddle);\n\n const form = data.form; // array with form data. can be undefined\n processFormData(form);\n\n const result = data.result; // object with result data\n processResultData(result);\n};\n\nfunction processResultData(result) {\n console.log(\"processResultData\");\n\n const title = result.title; // string with title\n const blockId = result.blockId; // number with block id\n\n console.log(\"title: \", title);\n console.log(\"blockId: \", blockId);\n}\n\nfunction processFormData(form) {\n console.log(\"processFormData\");\n\n if (form) {\n form.forEach((formEntry) => {\n const title = formEntry.title; // string with title\n const blockId = formEntry.blockId; // number with block id\n const answer = formEntry.value;\n\n console.log(\"title: \", title);\n console.log(\"blockId: \", blockId);\n\n if (isNaN(answer)) {\n // answer is a string\n const answerText = answer;\n\n // do something with answerText\n console.log(\"answerText: \", answerText);\n } else {\n // answer is a number\n const answerNumber = answer;\n\n // do something with answerNumber\n console.log(\"answerNumber: \", answerNumber);\n }\n });\n }\n}\n\nfunction processRiddleBlockData(riddle) {\n console.log(\"processRiddleBlockData: \", riddle);\n\n riddle.forEach((block) => {\n const title = block.title; // string with title\n const blockId = block.blockId; // number with block id\n const value = block.value; // array with answer data\n\n console.log(\"title: \", title);\n console.log(\"blockId: \", blockId);\n\n value.forEach((answer) => {\n if (isNaN(answer)) {\n // answer is a string\n const answerText = answer;\n\n // do something with answerText\n console.log(\"answerText: \", answerText);\n } else {\n // answer is a number\n const answerNumber = answer;\n\n // do something with answerNumber\n console.log(\"answerNumber: \", answerNumber);\n }\n });\n });\n}\n\nconst host = \"localhost\";\nconst port = 8000;\n\nconst server = http.createServer(requestListener);\nserver.listen(port, host, () => {\n console.log(`Server is running on http://${host}:${port}`);\n});\n\n```\n::\n",{"id":1210,"path":1211,"dir":1168,"title":1212,"description":1213,"keywords":1214,"body":1215},"content:7.Leads:5.Send leads to Mailchimp.md","/leads/send-leads-to-mailchimp","Send leads to Mailchimp","You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with Mailchimp.",[]," Send leads to Mailchimp You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with Mailchimp. Once the setup is completed as below, you do not need to do anything else. Create a Riddle. You must include an email form for the connection to work. Go to the PUBLISH step and click on Save and connect data. Go to Add integrations . Click on the blue ADD button next to Mailchimp. In the Mailchimp window that appears, login to your Mailchimp account. In the pop-up window that appears in Riddle, select the data you would like to sync from the Riddle with Mailchimp. Click on ADD LIST and / or ADD A TAG to sort your data in Mailchimp. Select the Riddle information, rule, and compare value. Click on SYNC . Go to Mailchimp and check that the automatic test lead is in the Audience section before sharing your Riddle with your audience.",{"id":1217,"path":1218,"dir":1168,"title":1219,"description":1220,"keywords":1221,"body":1224},"content:7.Leads:6.Send automated emails.md","/leads/send-automated-emails","Send automated emails","You can send customized emails to your audience based on their responses.",[1222,1223],"Set up email automation","Personalize automated emails"," Send automated emails You can send customized emails to your audience based on their responses. Set up email automation Under PUBLISH , go to Email automation and click on Enable email automation . Set up your default email if Default email is enabled with the following and click on SEND TEST MAIL : a recipient from the dropdown menu as Email an email subject email content Enable Advanced to add CC , BCC , and Reply to email addresses (all optional). Click on ADD CONDITIONAL EMAIL to set up an email that will only be sent to your audience who fulfil a specific condition. Set up your Conditional email #1 with the following and click on SEND TEST EMAIL : a condition or rule, such as 'Answer' > 'equals' > 'Dancer A' an email subject email content You will receive a test email. Repeat the process for as many conditional emails as you like. Personalize automated emails You can add customer-specific personalization to your automated emails. Click on the place in Email content where you would like to add the personalized content, click on the three dots top right above the email content field and select Variables . Select the form field data variable you would like to insert, such as Name. Click on SEND TEST EMAIL . You will receive a test email and your future leads will also receive the personalization in their automated email. Repeat the process for other personalized elements if you wish.",{"id":1226,"path":1227,"dir":1168,"title":1228,"description":1229,"keywords":1230,"body":1234},"content:7.Leads:7.Send leads to Zapier.md","/leads/send-leads-to-zapier","Send leads to Zapier","You can use Zapier to send Riddle results and information from Riddle to over 5000 apps. You can create a zap directly in Riddle or in Zapier.",[1231,1232,1233],"Create a Zap in Riddle","Create a Zap in Zapier","Top Zap Tips"," Send leads to Zapier You can use Zapier to send Riddle results and information from Riddle to over 5000 apps. You can create a zap directly in Riddle or in Zapier. Create a Zap in Riddle Create a Riddle. Add a lead generation form by clicking on ADD A FORM (LEAD) BLOCK and selecting the form you want. Go to the PUBLISH step and click on Save and connect data. Click on ADD next to Zapier. In the pop-up that appears, log in to authenticate your Zapier account. In the pop-up, click on Create Zap . Under 1. Trigger , type Riddle into the Search field and select Riddle Quiz Maker . Click on the Event field and select New Riddle Data & Lead . Click on Continue . Click on Sign in . Click on CONFIRM & RETURN TO ZAPIER . Click on Continue . Select a Project and a Riddle . Click on Continue . Click on Test trigger . Click on Continue . Under 2. Action , search for the application you'd like the Riddle information to be sent to. Select an event from the dropdown menu under Event . Click on Continue . Click on Sign in , choose the account you'd like to use, and click on Allow . Click on Continue . Enter / select any other data required by Zapier for the zap. Click on Continue . Click on Test action . Do your Riddle and then check whether the zap has been successful. If so, click on Publish . Done. The action is automated. Create a Zap in Zapier Log in to Zapier. Click on the orange Create Zap button. Type Riddle into the Search field and select Riddle Quiz Maker . Click on the Event field and select New Riddle Data & Lead . Click on Continue . Click on Sign in . Click on CONFIRM & RETURN TO ZAPIER . Click on Continue . Select a Project and a Riddle . Click on Continue . Click on Test trigger . You will see test data appear. Click on Continue . Search for the application you'd like the Riddle information to be sent to. Select an event from the dropdown menu under Event . Click on Continue . Click on Sign in , choose the account you'd like to use, and click on Allow . Click on Continue . Enter / select any other data required by Zapier for the zap. Click on Continue . Click on Test action . Do your Riddle and then check whether the zap has been successful. If so, click on Publish . Done. The action is automated. Top Zap Tips Only set up the zap when you have finished creating your Riddle. Every time you make changes to the Riddle and hit publish again, you need to refresh the zap (meaning go through all the steps again and refresh each option). Re-publishing a Riddle breaks the Zapier connection. If you're using Zapier with an email tool, make the email field in your Riddle mandatory.",{"id":1236,"path":1237,"dir":1168,"title":1238,"description":1239,"keywords":1240,"body":1241},"content:7.Leads:8.Send leads to Brevo.md","/leads/send-leads-to-brevo","Send leads to Brevo","You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with Brevo.",[]," Send leads to Brevo You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with Brevo. Once the setup is completed as below, you do not need to do anything else. Log in or sign up to Brevo . Create a Riddle. You must include an email form for the connection to work. Go to the Publish section and click on Save and connect data . Go to Add integrations . Click on the blue ADD button next to Brevo. In the pop-up that appears, enter the API key, which you can generate in Brevo under Main Menu --> SMTP & API --> API Keys --> Generate a new API key, and then click on the blue CONTINUE button. In the next pop-up window that appears in Riddle, select the data you would like to sync from the Riddle with Brevo. Click on ADD LIST and / or ADD A TAG to sort your data in Brevo. \nSelect the Riddle information, rule, and compare value. Click on SYNC . Brevo should now appear in your list of integrations under Connect your data . To test the integration, click on the three dots to the right under Brevo, click on Test integration , and click on SEND . Go to Brevo and check that the test lead is in the Contacts section before sharing your Riddle with your audience.",{"id":1243,"path":1244,"dir":1168,"title":1245,"description":1246,"keywords":1247,"body":1248},"content:7.Leads:9.Send leads to Salesforce.md","/leads/send-leads-to-salesforce","Send leads to Salesforce","You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with Salesforce.",[]," Send leads to Salesforce You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with Salesforce. Once the setup is completed as below, you do not need to do anything else. Create a Riddle. You must include an email form for the connection to work. Go to the Publish section and click on Save and connect data . Go to Add integrations . Click on the ADD button next to Salesforce. In the pop-up that appears, log in to your Salesforce account with your username and password. Make sure your account has sufficient access rights In the next pop-up window that appears in Riddle, select the Salesforce object you would like to sync from the Riddle with Salesforce to. Now, you can select the data you would like to sync from the Riddle with Salesforce. You can map Riddle data to your object's field here. Click on SYNC . Salesforce should now appear turned on in your list of integrations under Connect your data . To test the integration, click on the three dots to the right under Salesforce, click on Test integration , and click on SEND . Go to Salesforce and check that the test lead is in the right Object before sharing your Riddle with your audience.",{"id":1250,"path":1251,"dir":1168,"title":1252,"description":1253,"keywords":1254,"body":1255},"content:7.Leads:10.Send leads to ApiX-Drive.md","/leads/send-leads-to-apix-drive","Send leads to ApiX-Drive","You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with ApiX-Drive.",[]," Send leads to ApiX-Drive You can automatically sync Riddle lead data with ApiX-Drive. In ApiX-Drive, click on Create connection . Select the system as the Data Source , and specify Riddle. Specify the action Get DATA . Select the Riddle account from which will get the data. If there are no accounts connected to the system, click on Connect account . Enter the name of your account (if necessary) and click on Save . After this, reload the page and select the connected account if this did not happen automatically. Copy the link in the URL for receiving data field and go to your Riddle account. In Riddle, go to the Riddle you want to connect. Go to the Publish section, click on Save and connect data , and click on ADD next to Webhook . In the Webhook URL field, paste the previously copied link from ApiX-Drive, and click on CONTINUE . Enable your Webhook and click on SAVE .",{"id":1257,"path":1258,"dir":1168,"title":1259,"description":9,"keywords":1260,"body":1261},"content:7.Leads:11.Search for leads.md","/leads/search-for-leads","Search for leads",[]," Search for leads Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Search under MANAGE LEADS . Enter an exact email address in the search field and click on SEARCH . Click on DELETE next to any lead you would like to delete. ",{"id":1263,"path":1264,"dir":1168,"title":1265,"description":1266,"keywords":1267,"body":1268},"content:7.Leads:12.Failed leads.md","/leads/failed-leads","Failed leads","You can see all leads which failed to be processed or sent.",[]," Failed leads You can see all leads which failed to be processed or sent. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Failed leads under MANAGE LEADS . Click on Resend to re-add leads to the lead queue or DELETE to delete the failed leads from this list. ",{"id":1270,"path":1271,"dir":1168,"title":1272,"description":1273,"keywords":1274,"body":1277},"content:7.Leads:13.Delete leads from a Riddle.md","/leads/delete-leads-from-a-riddle","Delete leads from a Riddle","You can delete all leads from your selected Riddle. Be super careful - this is not reversible.",[1275,1276],"Delete all leads from a Riddle","Delete individual leads"," Delete leads from a Riddle You can delete all leads from your selected Riddle. Be super careful - this is not reversible . Delete all leads from a Riddle Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Delete all leads from a Riddle under MANAGE LEADS . Click on DELETE next to the Riddle whose leads you want to delete. In the popup that appears, enter your Riddle account email address , type \"DELETE\" and click on YES, DELETE ALL LEADS . Note: Deleting leads associated with a live leaderboard will also remove the data from the live leaderboard. WARNING: THIS WILL PERMANENTLY DELETE ALL LEADS FROM THIS RIDDLE. Delete individual leads Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Search & delete individual leads under MANAGE LEADS . Type the email address you want to delete into the Search field and click on DELETE next to the lead you want to delete. In the popup that appears, click on DELETE to confirm the deletion of the lead you selected. Note: Deleting leads associated with a live leaderboard will also remove the data from the live leaderboard. WARNING: THIS WILL PERMANENTLY DELETE ALL LEADS FROM THIS RIDDLE.",{"id":1279,"path":1280,"dir":1281,"title":1282,"description":1283,"keywords":1284,"body":1285},"content:7.Leads:14.Double opt-in:0.Set up DOI.md","/leads/double-opt-in/set-up-doi","double-opt-in","Set up DOI","Double opt-in provides enhanced consent, a higher quality subscriber base with lower unsubscribe rates, and even higher compliance with regulations.",[]," Set up DOI Double opt-in provides enhanced consent, a higher quality subscriber base with lower unsubscribe rates, and even higher compliance with regulations. Go to the PUBLISH step and click on Privacy / Opt-in . Enable the Double opt-in confirmation button. If you would like to send the email from your own server rather than Riddle's, enable SMTP . In the popup window, fill out all the fields. Your audience will then receive an email to confirm their consent that lead data is being collected.",{"id":1287,"path":1288,"dir":1281,"title":1289,"description":1290,"keywords":1291,"body":1292},"content:7.Leads:14.Double opt-in:1.Set up DOI via OTP.md","/leads/double-opt-in/set-up-doi-via-otp","Set up DOI via OTP","As well as using DOI via email confirmation, you can also use DOI via one-time password (OTP) codes.",[]," Set up DOI via OTP As well as using DOI via email confirmation, you can also use DOI via one-time password (OTP) codes. Go to the Publish section and click on Double opt-in (GDPR) . Enable Double opt-in via OTP code or click on EDIT if you already enabled it. Select the email field for Email recipient if not already there automatically, make any other changes to the setup, and click on SAVE & CLOSE . Your audience will then receive an email containing an OTP code which they have to enter into the Riddle they are taking part in. Please note: You cannot have the OTP verification and DOI email active at the same time. If you have your Riddle connected to a leaderboard and enable the OTP verification, your audience will be sent one code that combines the functionality for entering a leaderboard and email verification.",{"id":1294,"path":1295,"dir":1281,"title":1296,"description":1297,"keywords":1298,"body":1299},"content:7.Leads:14.Double opt-in:2.Set up DOI via OTP (SMS).md","/leads/double-opt-in/set-up-doi-via-otp-(sms)","Set up DOI via OTP (SMS)","You can also use DOI via one-time password (OTP) codes that are sent via SMS.",[]," Set up DOI via OTP (SMS) You can also use DOI via one-time password (OTP) codes that are sent via SMS. Register your company with WebSMS/LINK Mobility . In Riddle, go to Publish and click on Double opt-in (GDPR) . Enable Double opt-in via OTP (SMS) or click on EDIT if already enabled. Choose whether to save DOI-unconfirmed leads , select the phone number field for SMS recipient if not already there automatically, select your SMS vendor , enter the API key , and click on SAVE & CLOSE . Your audience will then receive an SMS containing an OTP code which they have to enter into the Riddle they are taking part in. Please note: You cannot have the OTP verification and DOI SMS active at the same time. If you have your Riddle connected to a leaderboard and enable the OTP verification, your audience will be sent one code that combines the functionality for entering a leaderboard and verification.",{"id":1301,"path":1302,"dir":1281,"title":1303,"description":1304,"keywords":1305,"body":1306},"content:7.Leads:14.Double opt-in:3.Save DOI-unconfirmed leads.md","/leads/double-opt-in/save-doi-unconfirmed-leads","Save DOI-unconfirmed leads","As well as saving DOI confirmed leads, you can also save DOI unconfirmed leads for use cases such as raffles.",[]," Save DOI-unconfirmed leads As well as saving DOI confirmed leads, you can also save DOI unconfirmed leads for use cases such as raffles. In your Riddle, go to Publish and click on on Double opt-in (GDPR) . Enable Double opt-in confirmation email or click on EDIT if you already enabled it. Enable Save DOI-unconfirmed leads , make any other changes to your DOI, and click on SAVE & CLOSE . In any future lead export, DOI-confirmed entries will be indicated with a time stamp and DOI-unconfirmed email addresses will be marked as \"unconfirmed\". ",{"id":1308,"path":1309,"dir":1168,"title":1310,"description":1311,"keywords":1312,"body":1314},"content:7.Leads:14.Pick a winner.md","/leads/pick-a-winner","Pick a winner (Raffle)","You can pick a winner from your leads in any Riddle that contains lead forms.",[1313],"Add conditions for the winner"," Pick a winner (Raffle) You can pick a winner from your leads in any Riddle that contains lead forms. Go to the Publish section and click on Pick a winner (Raffle) . Enable Exclude duplicates to make sure any email addresses that appear in your leads are only counted once (optional). Click on DRAW WINNER . The random winner's email will appear above DRAW WINNER . Add conditions for the winner Click on ADD CONDITION . Select specific criteria for your winner from the dropdown menu. Select a condition from the middle dropdown menu. Select a condition from the third dropdown menu / type text into the field. Repeat steps one to four for as many conditions as you like. Click on UPDATE CONDITIONS . Click on DRAW WINNER . The random winner's email will appear above DRAW WINNER . Feel free to use our legal text templates especially adapted for online raffles and contests.",{"id":1316,"path":1317,"dir":1318,"title":1319,"description":1320,"keywords":1321,"body":1325},"content:8.Tracking:0.Data layer.md","/tracking/data-layer","tracking","Data layer","The Riddle data layer allows you to enrich the data collected from your Riddle with external data provided by you and transmitted into the Riddle. You can use the data layer as part of our Business and Enterprise plans.",[1322,1323,1324],"Set up data layer variables","Use UTM URL variables","Use JavaScript"," Data layer The Riddle data layer allows you to enrich the data collected from your Riddle with external data provided by you and transmitted into the Riddle. You can use the data layer as part of our Business and Enterprise plans. You can pass data to the Riddle data layer using either UTM tags or JavaScript. Set up data layer variables Edit your Riddle and go to PUBLISH . Click on Data layer . Click on ADD ITEM . Enter an item key into the Key field. This is the name of the variable that you are sending to Riddle. If you are trying to catch a UTM tag with the name \"id\", then the item key needs to be \"id\". If your URL variable is mypage.html?source=xzy, then enter \"source\" as the key. Enter an item title into the Title field. The title helps you identify the data layer variable in your data exports and serves as the column header under which the values for the key are saved. If your UTM tag \"id\" has a value of \"3434\", you will see a column in your leads download with the item title in the column header and \"3434\" as the associated value. Use UTM URL variables A UTM variable is a variable you add to the URL. The most common use cases for UTM variables are: Identifying a marketing campaign Identifying a user who clicked on a link from an email marketing campaign A URL containing a UTM variable could look like this: https://www.riddle.com/?campaign_ID=googleads The UTM variable name is \"campaign_ID\", and the value is \"googleads\". To add the campaign to the Riddle data from your audience taking your quiz, you can add a data layer variable with the key \"campaign_ID\" and a title of your choice. When Riddle saves the data from the quiz taker, the value for the campaign_ID will be saved along with all the other Riddle data. As long as the data layer item key is exactly the same as the name of your URL variable, all data will be captured automatically. You don't need to do anything else other than test your setup at least once before running your campaign. Use JavaScript Using JavaScript is a more advanced technique to send data to the data layer. With JS you can pass any value to the Riddle in real time. Let's say you placed your Riddle after a user login screen. In this case, you already have all the user info like name and email, and there would be no point in asking for this information again in a Riddle form. By passing a user ID to the Riddle data layer you can combine the Riddle data and your stored user data using the ID. This means you don't need to transfer any personally identifiable information to Riddle. But of course, you could also send the user's name and email and use that to pre-fill a form, allowing the user to change that data if needed. Push the key and value to the riddleDataLayer object. This has to happen on the same page where you embedded the Riddle. If you have data stored already and want to send it to the Riddle when the Riddle loads, add your script after the Riddle iframe is loaded and send the data to the Riddle data layer as follows: window.riddleDataLayer = [];\nwindow.riddleDataLayer.push({\n key: \"mykey\",\n value: \"myvalue\"\n});\n You can also update more than one variable with JavaScript using this notation: \u003Cscript>\nwindow.riddleDataLayer = [\n { key: \"source\", value: \"mysource\" },\n { key: \"medium\", value: \"mymedium\" },\n];\n\u003C/script>\n If you are using an iframe inside a Riddle and want to update the data layer while your audience clicks through the Riddle, you need to push data to the data layer from within the Riddle iframe. This requires minor manipulation of the sample code: function storeText(){\n let input = document.getElementById(\"userInput\").value;\n window.parent.postMessage({dataLayerItem: {key: 'userinput', value: (input)}}, '*')\n window.parent.postMessage({'ad-iframe-complete': true}, '*'); \n \n }\n",{"id":1327,"path":1328,"dir":1318,"title":1329,"description":1330,"keywords":1331,"body":1334},"content:8.Tracking:1.Google Analytics.md","/tracking/google-analytics","Google Analytics","If you want to track page views or events from your embedded Riddle, you need to listen to events sent out by the Riddle iframe and then trigger Google Analytics events accordingly.",[1332,1333],"Set up Google Analytics","Enable Google Analytics"," Google Analytics If you want to track page views or events from your embedded Riddle, you need to listen to events sent out by the Riddle iframe and then trigger Google Analytics events accordingly. Set up Google Analytics Here's a guide on setting up Google Analytics . Enable Google Analytics In your Riddle, go to PUBLISH . Go to Tracking . Enable Google Analytics 4 . If you have your own custom Objectname, enable Custom Google Analytics configuration and change the default from \"gtag\" to whatever you are using. Please make sure to only change this if you know what you are doing. If you only want to track certain events, open Custom event configuration and uncheck events that you do not want to track. The default setting is that all Riddle events except \"Send form data\" are sent to Google Analytics. Click on SAVE . This is the default event we send to Google Analytics if you are using Universal Analytics: window.dataLayer\n\ndataLayer.push({\n eventCategory: riddleEvent.category,\n eventAction: riddleEvent.action,\n eventName: riddleEvent.name\n});\n Note: If you are still using the old and outdated Google ga Tag for Analytics, please enable Google Universal Analytics (deprecated) tracking. This is the default event we send to Google Analytics if you are using the deprecated Google Universal Analytics: window.ga\n\nga(\n \"send\",\n \"event\",\n [riddleEvent.category],\n [riddleEvent.action],\n [riddleEvent.name]\n);\n",{"id":1336,"path":1337,"dir":1318,"title":1338,"description":1339,"keywords":1340,"body":1341},"content:8.Tracking:2.Google Tag Manager.md","/tracking/google-tag-manager","Google Tag Manager","Use Google Tag Manager tracking if you have a Business or Enterprise Riddle Plan.",[]," Google Tag Manager Use Google Tag Manager tracking if you have a Business or Enterprise Riddle Plan. Set up and install Google Tag Manager . Go to the Publish section. Go to Tracking . Click on Google Tag Manager to enable tracking. As long as you embed the Riddle on a page where you run your standard Google Tag Manager Tag, all standard Riddle events will be sent to the GTM tag. If you have customized your tracking code and are not using dataLayer as your object variable, you can enable the Custom Google Tag Manager configuration and change the default from \"dataLayer\" to whatever you are using. Please make sure to only change this value if you know what you are doing. If you only want to track certain events, open Custom event configuration and uncheck events that you do not want to track. The default setting is that all Riddle events are sent to GTM. Create handling inside GTM to react to the events sent to Tag Manager by Riddle. This is the default event we send to Google Tag Manager: window.dataLayer\n\ndataLayer.push({ \neventCategory: riddleEvent.category, \neventAction: riddleEvent.action, \neventName: riddleEvent.name\n});\n",{"id":1343,"path":1344,"dir":1318,"title":1345,"description":1346,"keywords":1347,"body":1350},"content:8.Tracking:3.Matomo.md","/tracking/matomo","Matomo","Use Matomo as a tracking alternative if you have a Business or Enterprise Riddle Plan.",[1348,1349],"Set up Matomo","Use Matomo in Riddle"," Matomo Use Matomo as a tracking alternative if you have a Business or Enterprise Riddle Plan. Set up Matomo Here's a guide on setting up Matomo . Use Matomo in Riddle You can enable Matomo tracking on the publish step of your Riddle if you have our Pro, Business, or Enterprise Plan. Go to the Publish section. Go to Tracking . Click on Matomo to enable tracking. On the webpage where you embed the Riddle you need to have your Matomo tracking script enabled. Typically, you the Matomo Tracking Code is in the header section of every page, so no extra work is required. Riddle automatically sends all events to your Matomo tracking code. If you have customized your tracking code and are not using \"paq\" as variable prefix, you can enable the Custom Matomo configuration and change the default from \"paq\" to whatever you are using. Please only change this value if you know what you are doing. If you only want to track certain events, open Custom event configuration and uncheck events that you do not want to track. The default setting is that all Riddle events are sent to Matomo. This is the code we send to Matomo: window.paq\n\n\npaq(\"trackCustom\", riddleEvent.category, {\n eventAction: riddleEvent.action,\n eventName: riddleEvent.name\n});\n",{"id":1352,"path":1353,"dir":1318,"title":1354,"description":1355,"keywords":1356,"body":1359},"content:8.Tracking:4.Facebook Meta Pixel.md","/tracking/facebook-meta-pixel","Facebook Meta Pixel","Using Facebook / Meta Pixel tracking with Riddle requires you to embed the Riddle on a verified domain. As Riddle events are sent to Facebook / Meta as Custom Events, they require a verified domain to be recognized by Facebook / Meta. You can read more on why you need to verify your domain here.",[1357,1358],"Set up verified domains on Facebook / Meta","Use Facebook / Meta Pixel in Riddle"," Facebook Meta Pixel Using Facebook / Meta Pixel tracking with Riddle requires you to embed the Riddle on a verified domain. As Riddle events are sent to Facebook / Meta as Custom Events, they require a verified domain to be recognized by Facebook / Meta. You can read more on why you need to verify your domain here . Set up verified domains on Facebook / Meta Go to your your Meta Business Manager . Go to Business Settings. Go to the Brand Safety section. Please consult the Facebook guide for more information. Once your domain is verified, create a Meta Pixel or take the existing Pixel code from the Business Settings Data Sources section in Meta Business Manager and add it to the webpage where you want to embed the Riddle. Use Facebook / Meta Pixel in Riddle You can enable Facebook Pixel tracking on the publish step of your Riddle if you have our Pro, Business, or Enterprise Plan. Go to the Publish section. Go to Tracking . Click on Facebook / Meta Pixel to enable tracking. On the webpage where you embed the Riddle you need to have your Facebook tracking script enabled. Typically, you the Facebook Tracking Code is in the header section of every page, so no extra work is required. Riddle automatically sends all events to your Facebook tracking code. If you have customized your tracking code and are not using \"fbq\", you can enable the Custom Facebook Pixel configuration and change the default from \"fbq\" to whatever you are using. Please only change this value if you know what you are doing. If you only want to track certain events, open Custom event configuration and uncheck events that you do not want to track. The default setting is that all Riddle events are sent to Facebook. Install the Meta Pixel Helper in Google Chrome to ensure proper implementation of monitoring all events sent to Facebook. This is the code we send to Facebook / Meta Pixel: window.fbq\n\n\nfbq(\"trackCustom\", riddleEvent.category, {\n eventAction: riddleEvent.action,\n eventName: riddleEvent.name\n});\n",{"id":1361,"path":1362,"dir":1318,"title":1363,"description":1364,"keywords":1365,"body":1367},"content:8.Tracking:5.Adobe Analytics.md","/tracking/adobe-analytics","Adobe Analytics","Use Adobe Analytics as a tracking alternative if you have a Business or Enterprise Riddle Plan.",[1366],"Use Adobe Analytics in Riddle"," Adobe Analytics Use Adobe Analytics as a tracking alternative if you have a Business or Enterprise Riddle Plan. Use Adobe Analytics in Riddle You can enable Adobe Analytics tracking on the publish step of your Riddle if you have our Business, or Enterprise Plan. Go to the Publish section. Go to Tracking . Click on Adobe Analytics to enable tracking. On the webpage where you embed the Riddle you need to have your Adobe Analytics tracking script enabled. Typically, you the Adobe Analytics Tracking Code is in the header section of every page, so no extra work is required. Riddle automatically sends all events to your Adobe Analytics tracking code. If you have customized your tracking code and are not using the default variable prefix, you can enable the Custom Adobe Analytics configuration and change the default to whatever you are using. Please only change this value if you know what you are doing. If you only want to track certain events, open Custom event configuration and uncheck events that you do not want to track. The default setting is that all Riddle events are sent to Adobe Analytics.",{"id":1369,"path":1370,"dir":1318,"title":1371,"description":1372,"keywords":1373,"body":1374},"content:8.Tracking:6.Custom tracking.md","/tracking/custom-tracking","Custom tracking","You can track your Riddle events such as the submission of a lead form or when your audience answers a Riddle question. Riddle will execute the custom tracking code you add. The Riddle embed sends an event to your tracking script that is placed outside the Riddle iFrame.",[]," Custom tracking You can track your Riddle events such as the submission of a lead form or when your audience answers a Riddle question. Riddle will execute the custom tracking code you add. The Riddle embed sends an event to your tracking script that is placed outside the Riddle iFrame. Go to the Publish section. Click on Tracking . Click on Custom tracking to enable tracking. Publish your Riddle. Play the Riddle and check the console for the event log at the same time. Adjust your code accordingly. In the Event function field, add a script into the code which contains your own function and uses the parameter \"riddleEvent\". You can either use our default function \"riddleEvent) =>\" or even create your own function as long as you write the function as an arrow-function. If you only want to track certain events, enable Custom event configuration and uncheck events that you do not want to track. The default setting is that all Riddle events are sent to the browser console. Play around with the code below in a Riddle that has a form block. Make sure to either have all events enabled or at least have the Form Submit event enabled. If you are tracking multiple events, but only want to execute a particular piece of code if a form is submitted, you can add an if-statement to the tracking code as shown below. This example code will log all events into the console and also write the message \"form submitted\" if a form block is submitted. (riddleEvent) => { \nconsole.log(\"Riddle Event: \", riddleEvent) \nif (riddleEvent.action == \"Form_Submit\"){console.log(\"form submitted\")} };\n If you find the option to add your tracking code directly to the Riddle too limiting, enable Custom tracking and select the events you want to send. Then add a script to the page where you have the Riddle embedded to listen for Riddle events. To capture events on the parent page, replace the default event tracker script in the Riddle with this code sample: (riddleEvent) => { \n// Create a message object with the event data \nconst message = { type: \"riddleEvent\", \ndata: riddleEvent \n}; \n// Send the message to the parent page window.parent.postMessage(message, \"*\");\n};\n In this code, we create a message object that contains the event data in its data property. We also specify a type property to identify the message as a \"riddleEvent\" message. Finally, we use the postMessage method to send the message to the parent page, using \"*\" as the target origin to allow the message to be sent to any origin. 13. On the parent page, you can listen for this message using the message event: \u003Cscript>window.addEventListener(\"message\", (event) => { \n// Check that the message is from the iframe \n\n// Check that the message is a riddleEvent message \nif (event.data.type !== \"riddleEvent\") { \nreturn; \n} \n\n// Log the event data received from the iframe \nconsole.log(\"Riddle Event (from iframe): \", event.data.data);\n});\n\u003C/script>\n The listener code also logs the event data to the console but unlike the default Riddle setup, this time the console.log message is initiated from the parent page and not from within the iFrame. 14. Replace the console.log with your own code to process the event data.",{"id":1376,"path":1377,"dir":1318,"title":1378,"description":1379,"keywords":1380,"body":1383},"content:8.Tracking:7.JS Events.md","/tracking/js-events","JS Events","Each Riddle type has the same set of events, making it easy to write a general event listener that will work with all Riddles. The events sent by a Riddle are listed in the table below. Along with the event action, Riddle will send an event name to specify the action. For example, the Block_View event will send the name of the block that was viewed as the event name. The CoreMetrics event will send the type of event as the event name.",[1381,1382],"JS events breakdown","JS events properties"," JS Events Each Riddle type has the same set of events, making it easy to write a general event listener that will work with all Riddles. The events sent by a Riddle are listed in the table below. Along with the event action, Riddle will send an event name to specify the action. For example, the Block_View event will send the name of the block that was viewed as the event name. The CoreMetrics event will send the type of event as the event name. JS events breakdown Event Event action Event name Core Metrics that you can also see on the analyze / statistics screen in the Riddle creator. Events can be Start, View, etc. CoreMetrics View Tracked on the first user interaction (e.g. a click, typing) CoreMetrics Start Tracked when the user views their result page CoreMetrics Finish Block viewed. A block was loaded and displayed to the user Block_View Block submitted - either an answer option was chosen or the next button was clicked in a question block Block_Submit Tracked when the user clicks 'skip' at a block Block_Skip Click on \"Next\" button Block_Next Form or single form field submitted Form_Submit Send form data (user inputs) Form_Submit Form or single form field skipped Form_Skip Call to action button clicked Cta Social Shares. A social share button was clicked and a social share was initiated Social Lead Settings events send data such as cookies accepted as the event name LeadSettings Data layer variables dataLayer_{Data Layer Key} Unless you are using your own custom tracking script, you can use these events straight away with the most common tracking tools such as Meta Pixel (formerly Facebook Pixel), Google Analytics, Google Tag Manager, or Matomo. Please refer to our Custom tracking page to learn more about the tools and also get sample code that will get you started working with Riddle Events. JS events properties Every event that happens while someone plays a Riddle is made up of different properties. Event properties/event property names will only appear or contain data if they are applicable to that block. Here is a breakdown of these properties: Event property Event property name Same for every Riddle to identify a particular Riddle's event, also useful for external analytics tools category General short name for event that happens, slightly more detailed than category action More detailed than action, e.g. View, Start, Finish name The contents of the answer selected answer Form data that is filled out as JSON formAnswers The text entered into the description field in the Creator blockDescription The number assigned to the block in the Creator blockId The text entered into the title field in the Creator blockTitle The sort of block used here blockType Everything in a block, e.g. title, questions, images as JSON blockContent Configurated block options as JSON blockOptions The Riddle type used here blockTypeGroup true or false to denote whether this is a 2.0 or 1.0 Riddle isRiddle2Event The accumulative milliseconds spent on the Riddle in the iframe playTimeInMilliseconds The unique ID automatically assigned to the Riddle in the Creator riddleId Riddle data variables are sent with every event if enabled riddleDataLayer",{"id":1385,"path":1386,"dir":1387,"title":1388,"description":1389,"keywords":1390,"body":1395},"content:9.Custom coding:0.CSS editor.md","/custom-coding/css-editor","custom-coding","CSS editor","You can use CSS with Riddle to customize almost every visual aspect of your Riddles.\nSimply inspect your Riddle using your browser’s developer tools to find the correct CSS class, then restyle the class properties as needed.",[1391,1392,1393,1394],"Add CSS","Riddle CSS classes","Code example: change font color in form blocks","Code example: center text in answer fields"," CSS editor You can use CSS with Riddle to customize almost every visual aspect of your Riddles.\nSimply inspect your Riddle using your browser’s developer tools to find the correct CSS class, then restyle the class properties as needed. If you want to target specific text elements, you can also add custom classes in the Rich Text Editor for block titles and descriptions. You can customize: Buttons square buttons / make them rounder, wider, or narrower Borders remove / edit the border around your Riddles Hover states change the look or feel when mousing over or clicking any button Font types and sizing complete control over every text element Quiz layout one column or two, moving the logo Add CSS Go to the Palette section. Scroll down and click on CREATE A PALETTE, type a name into the Type your preset name here field, and click on SAVE . OR Click on CUSTOMIZE next to one of you own palettes. OR Click on COPY AND EDIT PALETTE next to a default palette. Scroll down to Custom CSS and click on EDIT . Add your CSS into the grey field. Click on FORMAT CODE and then SAVE . You will see the changes immediately in your Riddle. Riddle CSS classes Below are the most important Riddle elements you can change and the CSS selectors you need to make these changes. Element Description CSS selector Possible changes Complete Riddle This is the highest element of every Riddle .riddle Most changes can be done via the palette (background, border-radius, …) You could set the font-size here globally. Block This is the first element below .riddle, containing everything within one block .block You could set a block background image: .block {     background-image: url(\" https://downol.dr.dk/download/Eksponering/2024/Test/Riddle/bg2.jpg \"); background-position: top left; background-repeat: no-repeat; } Top bar This includes the pagination (page counter, progress bar) as well as timers if enabled .top-bar You can hide the top bar by turning off pagination and timers. Block Media Block media, set in the Creator .main-media / Title Title of each block, set in the Creator .title Color and font is set in palette. You can customize the font-size, font-weight, ... Description Description of each block, set in the Creator .description Color and font is set in palette. You can customize the font-size, font-weight, ... Buttons All buttons in the Embed (Start, Choose, Submit, …) .btn-primary Button colors can be set in the palette. You can customize border-radius, font-size, text-transfrom, padding, … Footer Area below the content, only showing if Footer text or custom logo are added in the \"Branding\" section in \"Settings\" .custom-footer Background is set in the palette, logo alignment is set in the settings. The footer text behaves according to the logo alignment. Block name pill \"Pill\" that gives instructions to your audience .block-type-pill Can be disabled in the palette. Colors are taken from \"Button color\" and \"Button text color\". Choices Choices in questions .choices Set the margin-top or margin-bottom, gap between items, specific background-color if needed. Choice element One single element within \".choices\" .choices .choice-content Everything here can be set via palette (color, background-color, hover / focus / selected state). Voting result The voting result contains information about whether a choice is right / wrong (Quiz) and how many people voted for it. .choices .choice .choice-content .voting-result Currently, hiding the absolute number of votes, but this will soon work via a setting. Answer explanation Explanation after your audience voted .answer-explanation Colors here are taken from positive / negative colors. Code example: change font color in form blocks This gives you control over the color of the text entered into form blocks. .riddle .form-control {\ncolor: red;\n}\n Code example: center text in answer fields This centers the text in each answer option. .riddle .quiz-choices .choice .choice-content .choice-title { \nalign-self: center; margin-bottom: 0; text-align: center; \n}\n Note: Add .riddle to any CSS selector, e.g .riddle button.btn.btn-primary For more code examples, go to CSS code snippet examples . If you're new to CSS, here's a good introduction on how to get started.",{"id":1397,"path":1398,"dir":1387,"title":1399,"description":1400,"keywords":1401,"body":1409},"content:9.Custom coding:1.CSS code snippet examples.md","/custom-coding/css-code-snippet-examples","CSS code snippet examples","You can copy, paste, and edit any of these code snippets below to customize your Riddle.",[873,1402,1403,1404,1405,1406,1407,1408],"Change text","Other formatting options","Move elements","Hide elements","Custom logo","Reaction poll block","General information"," CSS code snippet examples You can copy, paste, and edit any of these code snippets below to customize your Riddle. Change colors Change text color of button below choices .btn-primary {\n color: #4f4bc0;\n}\n Change description text color .description {\n color: #4f4bc0;\n}\n Change text color in free text block .text-entry-wrapper {\n color: #ffffff!important;\n}\n Change background color in a form field .form-control-wrapper {\n background: #ffffff;\n color: #ffffff;\n}\n Change answer option text color when hovering .choice-content:hover, .choice-title:hover {\n color: white!important;\n}\n Remove gray filter in a predictor .predictor-card:before {\n filter: none!important;\n}\n\n.predictor-card .overlay {\n background-color: rgba(0,0,0,0)!important;\n}\n Change pagination colors .top-bar .progress-wrapper .progress-tab.active {\nbackground-color: white;\n}\n.top-bar .progress-wrapper .progress-tab {\nbackground-color: grey;\n}\n.top-bar .pager {\nbackground-color: white;\n}\n Change result page background color .riddle .block[data-v-XXXXXX] {\n background: green;\n}\n Change correct/wrong tick color .icon-quiz-incorrect {\n color: green!important;\n}\n\n.icon-quiz-correct {\n color: red!important;\n}\n Change text Change \"Right\"/\"Wrong\" text for quiz questions .correct-wrong-banner .banner-content span {\n visibility: hidden;\n}\n.correct-wrong-banner.correct .banner-content:after {\n content: \"Right msg\"!important;\n margin-top: -2rem!important;\n}\n.correct-wrong-banner.incorrect .banner-content:after {\n content: \"Wrong msg\"!important;\n margin-top: -2rem!important;\n}\n Change \"Right\"/\"Wrong\" messages for answer explanations .explanation-wrapper .answer-explanation > h2 {\nvisibility: hidden;\nposition: relative;\n}\n.explanation-wrapper .answer-explanation.correct > h2:after {\ncontent: \"Correct Message\"!important;\nposition: absolute;\ntop: 50%;\nleft: 0;\nvisibility: visible;\n}\n.explanation-wrapper .answer-explanation.incorrect > h2:after {\ncontent: \"Wrong Message\"!important;\nposition: absolute;\ntop: 50%;\nleft: 0;\nvisibility: visible;\n}\n Other formatting options Capitalize first letter of each word on buttons .riddle .btn {\n text-transform: capitalize;\n}\n Make buttons all lower case .btn {\n text-transform: lowercase;\n}\n Change font, color, and text of the button below choices Change the color of the button in line 13: background-color by adding you own color value (ideally a HEX value). \nChange the text by changing line 9: content: \"Show me my results\". btn-primary {\n text-indent: -100 vw;\n visibility: hidden;\n display: block;\n line-height: 0;\n}\n\n.btn-primary::after {\n content: \"Show me my results\";\n visibility: visible;\n text-indent: 0;\n display: block;\n background-color: #4f4bc0;\n padding: 25px;\n border: none;\n border-radius: 0.5rem;\n color: # 4 F4BC0;\n font-size: 1.6 rem;\n font-weight: 600;\n transition: all .1 s;\n}\n Customize border around Riddle .riddle {\n border-radius: 28px!important;\n border: 4px solid #d11b88!important;\n}\n Remove predictor background color .predictor-card .overlay {\n background-color: rgba(0,0,0,0)!important;\n}\n Add wave layout to bottom of Riddle .block > .main-media::after {\n content: \"\";\n display: block;\n width: 100%;\n height: 8vw;\n position: absolute;\n transform: translateY(calc(-100% + 1px));\n background-color: var(--color-bg);\n z-index: 2;\n mask-image: url(\"data:image/svg+xml,%3Csvg xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' viewBox='0 0 600 50' preserveAspectRatio='none' %3E%3Cpath d='M0 0 c150 0 200 45 300 45 c100 0 150 -45 300 -45 v50 H0z' /%3E%3C/svg%3E\");\n\n}\n\n.riddle .riddle-type-component {\n border-bottom-left-radius: 0;\n border-bottom-right-radius: 0;\n}\n\nfooter::before {\n content: \"\";\n display: block;\n width: 100%;\n height: 8vw;\n background-color: var(--color-bg);\n mask-image: url(\"data:image/svg+xml,%3Csvg xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' viewBox='0 0 600 50' preserveAspectRatio='none' %3E%3Cpath d='M0 0 c150 0 200 45 300 45 c100 0 150 -45 300 -45 v50 H0z' /%3E%3C/svg%3E\");\n transform: rotate(180deg);\n border-top-left-radius: var(--riddle-border-radius);\n border-top-right-radius: var(--riddle-border-radius);\n margin-top: -2px;\n}\n Move elements Center text in quiz answer choices .quiz-choices .choice .choice-content .choice-title {\n align-self: center;\n margin-bottom: 0;\n text-align: center;\n}\n Center text for general answer choices .choice-title {\n align-self: center;\n margin-bottom: 0;\n text-align: center;\n}\n Customize gap between questions for answer fields .choices.is-columns {\n gap: 1px!important;\n margin-bottom: 4px!important;\n }\n.choice {\n margin: 0px!important;\n\n} \n Move radio button option box from right to left .form-element-block.radio-buttons .radio-group .form-check.radio.form-check-label { \n padding: 0.4rem 1.6rem 0.4rem 5.6rem; \n}\n\n.form-element-block.radio-buttons .radio-group .form-check.radio .form-check-input {\n left: 1.6rem;\n right: auto;\n}\n Hide elements Hide attribution .attribution {\n display: none!important;\n}\n Hide 'Show question' button .block .explanation-wrapper__navigation {\n display: flex;\n flex-direction: column-reverse;\n justify-content: center;\n gap: 1.2rem;\n\n .block-nav {\n .primary {\n justify-content: center;\n}\n}\n\n> .btn {\ndisplay: none;\n}\n Custom logo Change custom logo background color This is important if the footer and the logo should have different background colors. .custom-logo -wrapper {\nbackground-color: #ffffff!important;\n}\n Reaction poll block Hide the reaction poll slider hint text .instruction {\n display: none!important\n}\n Hide dot and number slider .active-bullet .positive {\nvisibility: hidden;\n}\n General information You can add CSS for any specific block by starting the code with .block-id-xx. You can hover over any block icon to find the block ID number. You can add CSS to a specific device type by starting the code with @media only screen and. These snippets are examples and sometimes require extra tailoring to suit your needs. You sometimes need to add .riddle to a selector, i.e. .riddle .btn.btn-primary, not button.btn.btn-primary.",{"id":1411,"path":1412,"dir":1413,"title":1414,"description":1415,"keywords":1416,"body":1422},"content:10.Analyze:0.Manage your Riddle stats.md","/analyze/manage-your-riddle-stats","analyze","Manage your Riddle stats","You can view and download all statistics revolving around your Riddle to really get to know your audience.",[1417,1418,433,1419,1420,1421],"View stats","Download stats","Reset stats","Export data","Understand your stats"," Manage your Riddle stats You can view and download all statistics revolving around your Riddle to really get to know your audience. View stats There are two ways to open stats: Open a Riddle and click on Analyze . Go to YOUR RIDDLES , hover over a Riddle and click on ANALYZE . Download stats Go to Analyze . Click on DOWNLOAD STATS & LEADS . Click on CSV under Download statistics . Done. The stats will be downloaded as a CSV file onto your device. Download leads Go to Analyze . Click on DOWNLOAD STATS & LEADS . Click on CSV or XLSX under Download leads . Done. The leads will be downloaded as your chosen file type onto your device. Note: If you have choices that contain a comma, these choices will be wrapped in quotation marks, so they don't break your import when working with your lead data. Reset stats You can reset stats from any given time period or reset all stats to zero for each Riddle. The data is then no longer stored on the Riddle server. Go to Analyze . Click on the three dots next to ALL TIME (or the time frame you selected). Click on RESET . In the pop-up, check the Yes, do it box and click on OK . Export data You can export your stats (and leads) to a software such as Google Sheets so that your stats update there automatically rather than only after downloading manually. Go to the lead integration help guides and follow the steps for your chosen integration. Understand your stats There are four statistics categories. Under Overview you can see the following statistics as a line graph:\n Views Starts Completions Leads completed Average engagement time Shares Under Breakdown you can see the following statistics:\n Question completion as a bar chart with a bar for each block showing whether the block was answered/completed Answer breakdown as a line graphic showing how many and what percentage of people chose each answer option A color-coded breakdown of how many and what percentage of people had the right / wrong answer for each question (where applicable) Results as a line graph with a raw count and percentage for each result page Score breakdown with a raw count and percentage of people who scored which points Under Leads & CTA you can see the following statistics:\n Lead generation as a line graph broken down into:\n Leads Leads completed Leads uncompleted Unique leads Form breakdown as a graphic indicating which actions were performed for each form block as a line with percentages and raw data CTA breakdown as a line graph with a raw count and percentage for each CTA button Under Audience you can see the following statistics:\n Regions as a pie chart and a table Device as a pie chart and a table Operating system as a pie chart and a table",{"id":1424,"path":1425,"dir":1413,"title":1426,"description":9,"keywords":1427,"body":1431},"content:10.Analyze:1.Overview.md","/analyze/overview","Overview",[1428,1429,1430],"Understand the overview","Understand conversions","Understand social sharing"," Overview Select or deselect any heading to see the data you need on the line graph. Views , Starts , and Completions are on the graph by default. Hover over any line to see the data summarized for any given date. The default view and time range is set to current week. To view live stats, click on the down arrow on the right and click on LIVE STATS . As soon as the Riddle is viewed or played, all associated statistics will appear on this dashboard here as they come in without refreshing the page. To filter the stats to a specific time range, click on the down arrow on the right, select a date range, and click on VIEW . To compare two custom time ranges, click on the down arrow on the right, select and input Custom date ranges , enable Compare with , and click on VIEW . To delete stats, click on the three dots on the right, click on RESET STATS , and in the pop-up that appears select the checkbox and click on OK . Caution: This will delete all statistics for this Riddle. Understand the overview Views are the number of times your Riddle was seen (loaded on a page plus viewed on the landing page version of the Riddle). Starts are the number of times your Riddle was opened and started, but not necessarily completed. Completions are the number of times your Riddle was done until the end. Leads completed are the number of leads where every required form field was filled out and the lead identifier was filled out. Engagement time is the average number of seconds and / or minutes spent on that Riddle on that day, regardless of whether they finish it or not. If someone stops a Riddle but leaves the Riddle page open, an automatic timeout will happen at 30 minutes. These 30 minutes will then be subtracted from the time spent on the Riddle to keep your data clean. Shares are the number of times someone shared their Riddle results using the share button you integrated into your Riddle. Understand conversions Conversations are your leads, split into Lead funnel and # Leads . The lead funnel shows the following statistics as a bar chart:\n Views - how often the Riddle was loaded Starts - how many people interacted with the first block Completions - how many people finished the Riddle Leads completed - the number of leads where every required form field and lead identifier was filled out # Leads show the following statistics as a stacked bar chart per day:\n Views Starts Completions Current leads If you have disabled 'Skip' for your lead form blocks, the number of completions should equal the number of leads completed. Each person that filled out all form fields is tracked as a completed lead. For more information, go to the Leads & CTA guide . The y-axis shows the number of people scaled to suit your data. For exact numbers, hover over each bar. In the best case, your Riddle can see opt-in rates of 20% to 40%, meaning 20% to 40% of your audience filled out their information in the form (lead) blocks so you now have this data. Understand social sharing Social sharing is how many people have shared their Riddle results and on which social network. They are tracked by social network name, raw count, and percentage of your audience. These stats are also converted into a pie chart with every color denoting a different social network.",{"id":1433,"path":1434,"dir":1413,"title":1435,"description":1436,"keywords":1437,"body":1442},"content:10.Analyze:2.Breakdown.md","/analyze/breakdown","Breakdown","You can see the detailed statistics for your Riddle's completion rates, the answers your audience gave, as well as the results they got.",[1438,1439,1440,1441],"Understand the question completion graph","Understand the answer breakdown","Understand results","Understand score breakdown"," Breakdown You can see the detailed statistics for your Riddle's completion rates, the answers your audience gave, as well as the results they got. Look at the bar chart to see which questions were submitted. Hover over any bar on the chart to see how many people submitted an answer for any given question. The default view and time range is set to current week. To view live stats, click on the down arrow on the right and click on LIVE STATS . As soon as the Riddle is viewed or played, all associated statistics will appear on this dashboard here as they come in without refreshing the page. To filter the stats to a specific time frame, click on the down arrow on the right, select a date range, and click on VIEW . To compare two custom time ranges, click on the down arrow on the right, select and input Custom date ranges , enable Compare with , and click on VIEW . To delete stats, click on the three dots on the right, click on RESET STATS , and in the pop-up that appears select the checkbox and click on OK . Caution: This will delete all stats for this Riddle. Understand the question completion graph The question completion graph is a breakdown of submits per block, regardless of which answer was given. The ID number refers to the ID assigned to that Riddle block. The blue bars indicate submitted blocks. The red bars indicate skipped blocks. Understand the answer breakdown The answer breakdown is your audience's answers for each block, split into a question-level stats and a right / wrong breakdown. Question information shows the following:\n Block title Block type Block ID Views - how many times the block was opened including repeat openings by the same person Submits - how many times someone clicked on the 'Submit' (or your customized equivalent) button Answered right Answered wrong Skips (where applicable) - the number of times someone clicked on the 'Skip' button. Right / Wrong breakdown shows the following:\n The number and percentage of people who got the question wrong or right The number and percentage of people who submitted an answer, each with their answer ID and answer content Your Promoter Score shows the following:\n The overall number and percentage of detractors, passives, promoters, and overall Promoter Score as a speedometer gauge and graph. The number and percentage for each score on the scale, each score labelled with the corresponding ID number. Understand results Results are the number and percentage of your audience who got each result title. Understand score breakdown Score breakdown breaks down the number and percentgage of people who got each possible outcome of points. ",{"id":1444,"path":1445,"dir":1413,"title":1446,"description":1447,"keywords":1448,"body":1453},"content:10.Analyze:3.Leads & CTA.md","/analyze/leads-and-cta","Leads & CTA","You can analyze every aspect of your lead generation form performance and see how effective your call to action buttons are. Leads are tracked as soon as you include any form block.",[1449,1450,1451,433,1452],"Understand lead generation","Understand form breakdown","Understand CTA performance","Understand downloaded leads sheet columns"," Leads & CTA You can analyze every aspect of your lead generation form performance and see how effective your call to action buttons are. Leads are tracked as soon as you include any form block. Select or deselect any colored key at the bottom of the graph to isolate the data you need on the line graph. Hover over any line to see the data summarized for any given date. The default view and time range is set to current week. To view live stats, click on the down arrow on the right and click on LIVE STATS . As soon as the Riddle is viewed or played, all associated statistics will appear on this dashboard here as they come in without refreshing the page. To filter the stats to a specific time frame, click on the down arrow on the right, select a date range, and click on VIEW . To compare two custom time ranges, click on the down arrow on the right, select and input Custom date ranges , enable Compare with , and click on VIEW . To delete stats, click on the three dots on the right, click on RESET STATS , and in the pop-up that appears select the checkbox and click on OK . Caution: This will delete all stats for this Riddle. Understand lead generation Lead generation is your leads stats and a visual represenation of those figures. There are five different statistics: Leads* - leads where one form field is filled out OR other option/freetext is filled out OR data layer is filled out. Completed leads* - the total number of leads that submitted every required form field and lead identifier was filled (if set). Incomplete leads* - the total number of leads minus completed leads. DOI unconfirmed leads - the total number of people that completed the Riddle but did not confirm DOI via the DOI email. Unique leads - the total number of leads minus duplicates *The definition of lead was changed on the 17th October 2024, upon popular request from our users. The definitions until 16th October 2024 were the following: Leads - the total number of tracked entries in form blocks. Completed leads - the total number of people that finished a Riddle. Incomplete leads - the total number of people that finished the first block of your Riddle. Understand form breakdown Form breakdown is a set of stats for each form (lead) block in your Riddle. There are five statistics for each form block: Form block type Block ID - the number assigned to that block Views - the number of times the block was opened Submits - the number of times someone clicked on the 'Submit' (or your customized equivalent) button. Skips - the number of times someone clicked on the 'Skip' button Submits and Skips are also displayed as a horizontal bar chart with the percentages and raw numbers of your audience. Understand CTA performance CTA (Call to action) performance is the number of times a CTA button on the result page was clicked and what percentage of all the CTA clicks this represents. If you only have one CTA button in your Riddle, the percentage will therefore be 100%. Download leads Go to Analyze . Click on Leads & CTA . Click on DOWNLOAD LEADS . Select the format you would like your lead statistics to be in:\n CSV is a generic format which you can then open in a tool of your choice. XLSX is the native Excel format so it is easier to open in Excel. Done. The leads will download directly onto your device. Understand downloaded leads sheet columns In addition to showing you the data from every content / form block, your downloaded leads sheet also shows you other information. Timestamp (UTC) This is the time when the Riddle was completed. Time taken (ms) This is the amount of miliseconds your audience spent on the Riddle. This time only includes question blocks. Lead ID This is a randomly generated code to identify this person.",{"id":1455,"path":1456,"dir":1413,"title":1457,"description":1458,"keywords":1459,"body":1465},"content:10.Analyze:4.Audience.md","/analyze/audience","Audience","You can see where your audience is, what device they're using, and what operating system they have.",[1460,1461,1462,1463,1464],"Understand domains","Understand regions","Understand devices","Understand OS","Understand peak concurrent users"," Audience You can see where your audience is, what device they're using, and what operating system they have. Hover over any slice of a pie chart to see the exact number of any given variable. The default view and time range is set to current week. To view live stats, click on the down arrow on the right and click on LIVE STATS . As soon as the Riddle is viewed or played, all associated statistics will appear on this dashboard here as they come in without refreshing the page. To filter the stats to a specific time frame, click on the down arrow on the right, select a date range, and click on VIEW . To compare two custom time ranges, click on the down arrow on the right, select and input Custom date ranges , enable Compare with , and click on VIEW . To delete stats, click on the three dots on the right, click on RESET STATS , and in the pop-up that appears select the checkbox and click on OK . Caution: This will delete all stats for this Riddle. Understand domains Domain is the website your audience viewed the content on. The pie chart shows the total number of views in the middle with segments representing each different domain. The table on the right of the pie chart represents this same information in three columns: Name - the domain name where the Riddle was viewed Count - the number of times the Riddle was viewed on that domain % - the percentage of total views that domain represents Understand regions Region is the location of your audience based on the their browser language. The pie chart shows the total number of views in the middle with segments representing each different country. The table on the right of the pie chart represents this same information in three columns: Name - the country code where the Riddle was viewed Count - the number of times the Riddle was viewed in that country % - the percentage of total views that country represents Understand devices Go to Device to see what devices your audience is using. This is based on the audience's user agent. The pie chart shows the total number of views in the middle with segments representing each type of device. The table on the right of the pie chart represents this same information in three columns: Name - the device type on which the Riddle was viewed Count - the number of times the Riddle was viewed on that type of device % - is the percentage of total views that device represents Understand OS OS (operating systems) are the operating systems your audience is using to . This is based on the audience's user agent. The pie chart shows the total number of views in the middle with segments representing each type of operating system. The table on the right of the pie chart represents this same information in three columns: Name - the operating system on which the Riddle was viewed Count - the number of times the Riddle was viewed on that type of operating system % - the percentage of total views that operating system represents Understand peak concurrent users Peak Concurrent Users shows the maximum number of users who were actively viewing or playing your Riddle at the same time during the selected time period. This metric helps you understand peak engagement moments and identify when your content experiences the highest simultaneous activity. The metric displays: The peak number of concurrent users The date and time when this peak occurred Trends over time to identify patterns in simultaneous usage This is particularly useful for: Understanding when your audience is most engaged Planning content releases or campaigns around peak times Identifying viral moments or traffic spikes Capacity planning for high-traffic events Note: For deeper analysis of Peak Concurrent Users, including breakdowns by date, project, or individual Riddle, you can use Google Looker Studio .",{"id":1467,"path":1468,"dir":1413,"title":1469,"description":1470,"keywords":1471,"body":1475},"content:10.Analyze:5.Timezones.md","/analyze/timezones","Timezones","Your audience can play your Riddles around the world, meaning across different timezones.",[1472,1473,1474],"Stats","Leads","Opening/closing date"," Timezones Your audience can play your Riddles around the world, meaning across different timezones. Stats The timezone shown for stats is UTC. Example: Riddle receives a view from any country on 01.10.24 at 01:59 CEST => \nThe view is still counted for 30.09.24. Leads The timezone shown for leads is UTC. Example: Riddle receives a lead from any country on 01.10.24 at 01:59 CEST => \nThe lead shows 30.09.24 23:59 in the download. Opening/closing date The timezone for a Riddle opening/closing date is the local time of the creator. Example: Creator sets the opening date to 01.10.24 at 20:00 BST => \nA visitor from Germany can play the Riddle starting from 01.10.24 at 21:00 CEST.",{"id":1477,"path":1478,"dir":1479,"title":1480,"description":1481,"keywords":1482,"body":1484},"content:10.Analyze:6.Google Looker Studio:0.Connect to Google Looker Studio.md","/analyze/google-looker-studio/connect-to-google-looker-studio","google-looker-studio","Connect to Google Looker Studio","You can use Google Looker Studio to get insights about how Riddles and projects perform. You will need a Riddle.com account to operate this connector. If you don't already have an one, set up a Riddle.com account.",[1483],"Peak Concurrent Users"," Connect to Google Looker Studio You can use Google Looker Studio to get insights about how Riddles and projects perform. You will need a Riddle.com account to operate this connector. If you don't already have an one, set up a Riddle.com account . Go to Looker Studio. Click on  Create  and select  Data source . Enter  Riddle Analytics  in the search bar and click on the  Riddle Analytics  connector. Click on  AUTHORISE . Log in to your Google account. Click on  Allow . In the new window that appears, log in to your Riddle.com account if you are not already logged in. Select a project from the dropdown list, choosing  Personal project  to gain access to all projects, or All projects + personal project to gain access to all Riddles in your account, later on, and click on  NEXT . Select a  Riddle title  or  Stats for all Riddles in the selected project  from the dropdown menu, and click on  CONNECT  top right. Click on CREATE REPORT to create a default report. \n11. Learn more about how to work with Looker Studio to add to, view, and share your reports. Peak Concurrent Users You can analyze Peak Concurrent Users in Looker Studio for deeper insights into simultaneous user activity. Peak Concurrent Users shows the maximum number of users who were actively viewing or playing your Riddle at the same time. Available modes The Peak Concurrent Users metric can be analyzed in three different modes, depending on which fields you select: 1. Global Concurrent Users Max Mode This mode provides statistics on a global basis across all your Riddles. Triggered when: Only Date and Peak Concurrent Users fields are selected (no Project or Riddle fields) Supported fields: Date (to split data by day) Peak Concurrent Users Use case: Understand overall peak engagement across your entire account 2. Project Stats This mode provides statistics on a team/project basis. Triggered when: Only Project and Metric fields are selected (no Riddle fields) Supported fields: Project Peak Concurrent Users Date (optional, to split by day) Use case: Compare peak engagement across different projects or teams 3. Riddle Stats This mode provides statistics on an individual Riddle basis. Triggered when: A Riddle field is present OR no Project field is present Aggregation: This mode aggregates all Riddles that match the Data Source (all project Riddles + personal project Riddles) Supported fields: Riddle (optional, to filter specific Riddles) Peak Concurrent Users Date (optional, to split by day) Use case: Analyze peak engagement for specific Riddles or compare performance across individual pieces of content How to configure After connecting your data source, click on CREATE REPORT or open an existing report. Add a chart (e.g., Time Series, Table, or Scorecard). In the Data panel, add the Peak Concurrent Users metric. Add dimension fields based on the mode you want:\n Global mode: Add only Date (optional) and Peak Concurrent Users Project mode: Add Project and Peak Concurrent Users (and optionally Date ) Riddle mode: Add Riddle (optional) and Peak Concurrent Users (and optionally Date ) Customize your visualization to show trends, comparisons, or specific time periods. Tip: Use Date as a dimension to see how Peak Concurrent Users changes over time, helping you identify patterns and peak engagement moments.",{"id":1486,"path":1487,"dir":1479,"title":1488,"description":9,"keywords":1489,"body":1498},"content:10.Analyze:6.Google Looker Studio:1.FAQ and troubleshooting.md","/analyze/google-looker-studio/faq-and-troubleshooting","FAQ and troubleshooting",[1490,1491,1492,1493,1494,1495,1496,1497],"Can I use Looker Studio with my Riddle.com subscription?","I'm running a marketing campaign on a single Riddle. Can I use Looker Studio to analyze its traffic?","Can I view CTA stats analytics in Looker Studio?","I have a project with more than one Riddle and I want to measure and compare how the Riddles in it performed. How can I do this?","My report is empty - what's wrong?","Can I use the integration to integrate Riddle 1.0 stats?","How do I remove the Looker Studio connection?","I have a question that is not answered here. What can I do?"," FAQ and troubleshooting Can I use Looker Studio with my Riddle.com subscription? The Looker Studio integration is only available for free trial users and Enterprise customers. You can check the plan you're subscribed to on your subscription page . I'm running a marketing campaign on a single Riddle. Can I use Looker Studio to analyze its traffic? Yes. To do that select the project the Riddle is in plus the Riddle you want to analyze in the next step. This connection will only return data for this Riddle and is the most precise data you get, returning daily-basis data. Can I view CTA stats analytics in Looker Studio? Yes but you have to make sure to select the individual Riddle you're interested in. The CTA stats are only available on an individual basis, not on the global stats basis. I have a project with more than one Riddle and I want to measure and compare how the Riddles in it performed. How can I do this? To do that select the project you want to analyze and select Global stats to get an overview of all Riddles within one project. This connection will return data for all Riddles in the project but will be less precise than the connection for a single Riddle. For every date range there will be 15 aggregated data points. My report is empty - what's wrong? Make sure you have selected the correct project and Riddle. Additionally check on the stats dashboard in Riddle.com if there is data available for the selected date range. If there is no data available in Riddle.com , there will be no data available in Looker Studio. Please note : If you work with the dimension Published At , only currently published Riddles will be returned in the data. Unpublished Riddles can lead to an empty report with Published at . Can I use the integration to integrate Riddle 1.0 stats? Yes that is possible through Global stats . The Riddle selector only works with 2.0 Riddles. How do I remove the Looker Studio connection? Removing the connection is possible through Looker Studio itself and Riddle (removing the associated personal/project API key). When you remove the API key on Riddle.com the Looker Studio connection will remain but won't be accessible anymore. I have a question that is not answered here. What can I do? Please write to us in our support chat on Riddle.com, reach out to us at hello@riddle.com , or visit our Help Center .",{"id":1500,"path":1501,"dir":1502,"title":1503,"description":9,"keywords":1504,"body":1507},"content:11.Account:0.Log in to Riddle.md","/account/log-in-to-riddle","account","Log in to Riddle",[1505,1506],"Login via your Riddle account email address","Login via SSO"," Log in to Riddle Login via your Riddle account email address On Riddle.com, click on LOG IN . Enter your email and password. You will receive an email with a confirmation code. This 2FA code is valid for two days. Enter the one-time code into the field in Riddle and click on LOG IN . From the moment you log in, it is possible to stay logged in for seven days. If you prefer to use Google Authenticator for 2FA, activate Google Authenticator . Login via SSO On Riddle.com, click on LOG IN . Enter your Riddle account email and click ENTER. This will trigger a redirect to your organization's SSO login. Enter the same email again and the corresponding password (and 2FA code) for your account. ",{"id":1509,"path":1510,"dir":1502,"title":1511,"description":1512,"keywords":1513,"body":1515},"content:11.Account:1.Update personal data.md","/account/update-personal-data","Update personal data","You can always change your name, display name, and email address.",[1514],"Delete your account"," Update personal data You can always change your name, display name, and email address. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Personal data under ACCOUNT . Enter any updated information in the relevant fields. Click on UPDATE PERSONAL DATA . Enter the 2FA code you received via email or via your authenticator application. Click on CONFIRM CHANGE . Delete your account You can permanently delete your Riddle account from the Personal data page. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on DELETE ACCOUNT . This action is irreversible and will remove all your Riddles, leads, and account data.",{"id":1517,"path":1518,"dir":1502,"title":1519,"description":9,"keywords":1520,"body":1521},"content:11.Account:2.Change your password.md","/account/change-your-password","Change your password",[]," Change your password Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Change password under ACCOUNT . Enter your current password and then your new password twice in the relevant fields. Click on UPDATE .",{"id":1523,"path":1524,"dir":1502,"title":1525,"description":1526,"keywords":1527,"body":1535},"content:11.Account:3.Manage your subscription.md","/account/manage-your-subscription","Manage your subscription","You can always adjust your account, plan, and billing details.",[1528,1529,1530,1531,1532,1533,1534,1514],"Change plan","Cancel your subscription","Manage add ons","Invoices","Payment methods","Change your data","Change your billing address"," Manage your subscription You can always adjust your account, plan, and billing details. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Subscription under ACCOUNT . Click on MANAGE SUBSCRIPTION to perform any of the actions below. Change plan Click on Subscription . Click on Change plan . Select the plan you want to change to. Click on Choose subscription . Cancel your subscription Click on Subscription . Click on Cancel subscription . Click on Yes, cancel . Please note all your content will be unpublished and go offline when your subscription ends. Manage add ons Click on Add ons . Click on Add / remove seats . Use the - and + buttons to adjust the number of seats in your account. Click on Confirm user license change . Click on Add / remove domains . Use the - and + buttons to adjust the number of domains in your account. Click on Confirm user license change . Invoices Click on Invoices . Click on View or Download . Payment methods You can choose between PayPal, Credit Card, Bank Transfer (only annual subscriptions), Apple Pay and Google Pay to pay for your Riddle subscription. Click on Payment methods . Click on Create new payment source or Update . Enter the payment details in the relevant fields. Change your data Click on Account . Click on Edit next to Your data . Enter the updated information in the relevant fields. Click on Update . Change your billing address Click on Account . Click on Edit next to Billing address . Enter the updated information in the relevant fields. Click on Save . Delete your account If you delete your account, all your Riddles, projects, stats, and leads will be deleted. Please only use this option if you will never use Riddle again. Click on Personal data . Click on Delete account .",{"id":1537,"path":1538,"dir":1502,"title":1539,"description":1540,"keywords":1541,"body":1542},"content:11.Account:4.What happens after the free trial or when I cancel my account.md","/account/what-happens-after-the-free-trial-or-when-i-cancel-my-account","What happens after the free trial or when I cancel my account","You can cancel anytime. If you do:",[]," What happens after the free trial or when I cancel my account You can cancel anytime. If you do: You can no longer create, edit, publish, or embed Riddles. All your Riddles will be unpublished and go offline. A placeholder image will replace the Riddle on your site. You therefore need to remove the Riddle embeds from your site. Your leads will be lost. Stats can no longer be viewed or downloaded.",{"id":1544,"path":1545,"dir":1502,"title":1546,"description":1547,"keywords":1548,"body":1553},"content:11.Account:5.All subscriptions plans - explained.md","/account/all-subscriptions-plans-explained","All subscription plans - explained","There are three plans to choose from, two self-service and one full-service.",[1549,1550,1551,1552],"Pro","Business","Enterprise","All three plans"," All subscription plans - explained There are three plans to choose from, two self-service and one full-service. Here's a Riddle to help you decide which plan is best for you: Which Riddle plan is best for me? Differences between the plans include content creation, white-labelling, embedding, tracking, media, leads, support, and contracts. You can always upgrade or downgrade between the plans to suit your needs. For the latest pricing details, visit riddle.com/pricing . Pro This self-service plan includes: 100% white-labelling All Riddle branding removed Embedding Riddles on three domains Facebook/Pixel tracking Business This self-service plan includes all Pro features plus: Full brand customization CSS editing to change colors and fonts for each and every element, format texts, hide and move elements, reshape buttons and borders, and more Custom fonts MP4 video uploads Embedding Riddles on ten domains Tracking with tools including Google and Matomo Enterprise This is your full-service plan that includes all Business features plus: Tailor-made, flexible service Turn-key content CSS support SSO Custom documentation Media library integrations Custom contracts Custom DPAs Custom InfoSec documentation Custom feature development All three plans Unlimited usage Unlimited projects to stay organized and create content by department, client, or project Unlimited traffic GDPR compliance Extra user licenses to collaborate with your colleagues or clients for $19/month Extra domains for more websites or clients for $39/month",{"id":1555,"path":1556,"dir":1502,"title":1557,"description":1558,"keywords":1559,"body":1560},"content:11.Account:6.Activate two-factor authentication with Google Authenticator.md","/account/activate-two-factor-authentication-with-google-authenticator","Activate two-factor authentication with Google Authenticator","You can change two-factor authentication (2FA) from the default email authentication to Google Authenticator.",[]," Activate two-factor authentication with Google Authenticator You can change two-factor authentication (2FA) from the default email authentication to Google Authenticator. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Two-factor authentication under ACCOUNT . Click on ENABLE GOOGLE AUTHENTICATOR . Open the Google Authenticator app on your smartphone. If you don't have the app already, download it . In Google Authenticator, click on the multi-colored plus button in the bottom right corner. Tap on Scan a QR code . Scan the QR code in Riddle. Enter the 6-digit code into the Confirmation code field in Riddle. Every time you log in to Riddle, enter the confirmation code in the Google Authenticator app. From the moment you log in, it is possible to stay logged in for seven days.",{"id":1562,"path":1563,"dir":1564,"title":1565,"description":1566,"keywords":1567,"body":1575},"content:12.Collaboration:0.Your projects.md","/collaboration/your-projects","collaboration","Your projects","All Riddle plans are multi-user so you can collaborate on Riddles with colleagues and clients.",[1568,1569,1570,1571,1572,1102,1573,1574,39],"Create a new project","Add a member to a project","Transfer an existing Riddle to a project","Edit members","Join a project","Additional project ideas","Content locking"," Your projects All Riddle plans are multi-user so you can collaborate on Riddles with colleagues and clients. Create a new project When you log in to your Riddle account, you will be in your PERSONAL account by default. To work with others on a Riddle you need to create a project so that you can work together. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on CREATE PROJECT . Type a project title into the Name field. Click on CREATE . Add a member to a project Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Go to one of your projects. Click on Members on the menu list on the left. Type in the email addresses of the people you want to add to the project into the Email field. Assign a role to this person from the dropdown menu. Click on the green ADD MEMBER button. Repeat steps 2-5 for all the people you would like to add. The number of available and used seats appears with a percentage bar. Your maximum number of seats depends on which plan and how many added seats you have. If the added member already has a Riddle login, the Riddle will be visible in the project in their account immediately. If the added member does not have a Riddle login yet, they will receive an email with a link for joining the project (see Join a project below). Transfer an existing Riddle to a project Go to YOUR RIDDLES . Click on the three dots next to your Riddle and then TRANSFER . Select a Project Destination from the dropdown menu. Click on CONFIRM TRANSFER TO THIS PROJECT . Edit members Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on EDIT next to the project you would like to change. Click on Delete to delete a member. Select a role from the dropdown menu to change a member's role. Enter an email address into the Email field and click on ADD MEMBER to add a new member. Join a project Click on the Riddle.com link in the automated email you receive from Riddle ( mail@mailer.riddle.com ). Use the email address and temporary password provided in the email to log in. Click on the three dots in the top right corner. Click on Change password under the ACCOUNT section. Enter the current password and new password in the password fields. Click on the blue UPDATE button. Done. You can now edit Riddles or create your own in the project you've joined. Add ad slots You can configure ad slots for a project to use again and again in any Riddle in that project. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on Ad Slots . Enter the Slot , Head , Code , and Variables . Click on Add more ad slots and repeat step 4 for as many ad slots as you like. Click on SAVE . You can now insert an ad slot into a Riddle . Additional project ideas You might also want to add projects separated by: Language \nYou might be supporting sites across multiple languages, so we recommend Riddle's publishing partners create projects for each language (French, Spanish, etc.). Department \nOne project for marketing, another for editorial, and so on. Client \nThis is especially true for agencies using Riddle. Client-specific projects help them collaborate while limiting their visibility and access to their content only. Content locking When multiple team members work on the same Riddle simultaneously, Riddle uses granular content locking to ensure smooth collaboration without conflicts. How it works Previously, if someone was editing a Riddle, the entire Riddle would be locked and unavailable to other users. Now, Riddle uses granular locking that only locks the specific parts of the Creator where another user is actively working. What gets locked: The specific block being edited The settings group currently being modified The publish settings section if someone is configuring publish options The Analyze tab if someone is viewing analytics What stays accessible: Other blocks in the Riddle Other settings groups Other sections of the Creator Benefits Better collaboration: Multiple team members can work on different parts of the same Riddle simultaneously No conflicts: You'll see a visual indicator when a specific section is locked by another user More efficient: No need to wait for someone to finish editing before you can start working Clear communication: You can see exactly which parts are in use and by whom Visual indicators When a section is locked by another user, you'll see: A lock icon indicating which part is currently being edited The name of the user who is currently editing that section A message indicating that the section will be available once the other user finishes This granular approach makes collaboration smoother and more efficient, allowing teams to work together without stepping on each other's toes. Top tips You can create unlimited workspaces / projects with Riddle and then invite any of your colleagues or clients for $19 per month ( see our pricing here ). Don't worry - each user can belong to any number of projects. They will only be counted as a single user. Create a minimum of two projects, one for finished Riddles, the other for drafts. When your team finalizes a Riddle, they should transfer the Riddle to the finished project.",{"id":1577,"path":1578,"dir":1564,"title":1579,"description":1580,"keywords":1581,"body":1587},"content:12.Collaboration:1.Your user seats.md","/collaboration/your-user-seats","Your user seats","Every person who logs into Riddle needs their own account. If you have reached your seat limit, you can add more anytime. User seats can only be added by the account owner. The account owner does not count as a used seat.",[1582,1583,1584,1585,1586],"Add user seats to your account","Remove seats from your account","Invite user","Free up a user seat","Update a user seat"," Your user seats Every person who logs into Riddle needs their own account. If you have reached your seat limit, you can add more anytime. User seats can only be added by the account owner. The account owner does not count as a used seat. You can remove someone from a current seat to free it up for a different user. Add user seats to your account Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your user seats under COLLABORATION . Click on BUY USER SEATS. Click on the + to increase the number of seats, read the payment policy change and click on Confirm user license change . This will trigger a payment change. Remove seats from your account Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your user seats under COLLABORATION . Click on BUY USER SEATS. Click on the - to decrease the number of seats, read the payment policy change and click on Confirm user license change . This will trigger a payment change. Invite user Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your user seats under COLLABORATION . Enter the email of the user you want to invite and click on INVITE USER . In the pop-up, select the project(s) you want to invite the user to and assign a role to them from the dropdown menu and click on INVITE . Free up a user seat Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your user seats under COLLABORATION . Click on EDIT next to the email address of the user you'd like to remove and click on REMOVE FROM ACCOUNT. You can now reuse the free seat for someone else and add a member / user to any of your projects. Update a user seat Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your user seats under COLLABORATION . Click on EDIT next to the email address of the user you'd like to change. In the pop-up, select the project(s) or role(s) you want to change and click on UPDATE . ",{"id":1589,"path":1590,"dir":1564,"title":1591,"description":1592,"keywords":1593,"body":1600},"content:12.Collaboration:2.Your user roles.md","/collaboration/your-user-roles","Your user roles","Every project member has a role. Your user role options depend on your Riddle.com subscription plan.",[1594,1595,1596,1597,1598,1599],"Edit default roles (Enterprise)","Create new user role (Enterprise)","Permissions","AI permissions","Content accessibility permissions","Permissions for transferring Riddles"," Your user roles Every project member has a role. Your user role options depend on your Riddle.com subscription plan. Essential Pro Business Enterprise Default Admin role only.* Default Admin role only.* Default Admin, Author, and Editor roles.* Default roles, customizable roles, and self-created roles. You can assign a default or customized role and role name to each project member. *Pre-existing roles created before January 2024 will remain unchanged. Edit default roles (Enterprise) Click on the settings icon in the top right corner. Click on Your user roles under COLLABORATION . \nHere you can see all the roles you have assigned and how many times they've been used. Click on the role you'd like to edit. Select / deselect any of the permissions. Enter a name for the customized role in the Name field. Click on SAVE NEW USER ROLE . \nThe edited role will appear in Your user roles list. Create new user role (Enterprise) Click on the settings icon in the top right corner. Click on Your user roles under COLLABORATION . \nHere you can see all the roles you have assigned and how many times they've been used. Click on CREATE USER ROLE . Enter a name in the Name field. Select any of the permissions. Click on SAVE USER ROLE . Permissions Permission/role Admin Editor Author = Most powerful project role with unlimited access and permission to make unlimited changes to all of the following: = Editor is ideal for the majority of your project members. = Designed for junior members of your project, interns, or freelancers. Individual Riddles Edit Riddles, add tags, and notes x x x Create and copy Riddles (no editing rights) x x x Delete Riddles x Transfer Riddles between projects x View Riddle \"Publish\" tab, publish Riddles, and edit publish settings x x View Riddle \"Analyze\" tab and stats x x Delete Riddle stats x Download Riddle stats x Presets Apply project presets x Edit Riddle settings x x Edit palette x x Create and save project presets x Integrations Create, delete, and edit account integrations x Connect / disconnect existing Riddle integrations x x Privacy & Data collection View leads tab under \"Analyze\" x Download leads x Search for and delete leads x Add / edit blocks for data collection x Templates Create templates x x Use templates x x x Delete templates x Projects Create new projects (this role will always have admin rights in their created projects) x Update project settings x Update project ads x Update project members x Update project member roles x Update project API keys x Access media library x Custom messaging Update SMTP gateway credentials x Update company data details x Domains Allow access x Billing Allow access x AI Features Create from AI x x Use file upload to create content x x Use AI assistant in creator to answer questions x x Content Accessibility Create inaccessible content x x AI permissions You can now control AI feature access with granular permissions: Create from AI: Allows users to create new Riddles using AI generation features Use file upload to create content: Permits users to upload files (like PDFs, Word documents) and use AI to generate content from them Use AI assistant in creator to answer questions: Enables users to access the AI assistant within the Creator to get help and suggestions These permissions help you control AI usage costs and ensure only authorized team members can use AI features. Content accessibility permissions The Create inaccessible content permission controls whether users can create content that doesn't meet accessibility standards. When this permission is enabled: Users can create and use inaccessible blocks and settings All content creation features are available When this permission is disabled: Inaccessible blocks are hidden from the block selection menu Certain settings that would create inaccessible content are automatically enabled or disabled by default Users cannot override accessibility settings to create inaccessible content This ensures that users without this permission can only create accessible content, helping maintain compliance with accessibility standards across your organization. Permissions for transferring Riddles A Riddle cannot be transferred into a project if the access level in the target project is lower than in the source project. For example, if a creator user has no permission to use data collection blocks in the new project, the Riddle cannot be transferred. The permissions required for transferring Riddle are as follows: Source --> target project Permissions required Permission required in Personal project --> project Create Riddles Transfer Riddles Target project Project --> personal project Delete Riddles Source project Project --> project Transfer Riddles Target project",{"id":1602,"path":1603,"dir":1564,"title":1604,"description":1605,"keywords":1606,"body":1614},"content:12.Collaboration:3.Use project presets.md","/collaboration/use-project-presets","Use project presets","You can save and reuse layout, palette, and settings as a project preset. This will then apply to every Riddle in a project, saving time and creating uniformity for your company. Every member in your project can access this preset.",[1607,1608,1609,1610,1611,1612,1613],"Create a project preset","Create another project preset","Apply an existing project preset to a Riddle","Edit a project preset","Rename a project preset","Delete a project preset","Set a default project preset to a project"," Use project presets You can save and reuse layout, palette, and settings as a project preset. This will then apply to every Riddle in a project, saving time and creating uniformity for your company. Every member in your project can access this preset. Create a project preset Open a Riddle in a project, and go to the Palette or Settings section. Click on SAVE THIS AS A PROJECT PRESET . Enter a name in the Type your preset name here field and click on SAVE . Make as many changes to the design , colors , font , and settings as you like, and then click on the save icon to save changes to the preset. Please note: All Riddles with this project preset will adopt any changes you make. Create another project preset Click on the plus icon to create a new preset. Enter a name in the Type your preset name here field and click on SAVE . Make as many changes to the design , colors , font , and settings as you like, and click on the save icon to save changes to the preset. Please note: All Riddles with this project preset will adopt any changes you make. Apply an existing project preset to a Riddle Open a Riddle in a project and go to the  Palette or Settings  section. Select a preset from the dropdown menu under  Project preset . In the popup window, click on the  APPLY PROJECT PRESET SETTINGS  button. Edit a project preset Open a Riddle in a project and go to the Palette or Settings section. Select a preset from the dropdown menu under Project preset . Make as many changes to the design , colors , font , and settings as you like, and click on the save icon to save changes to the preset. Click on the arrow icon to reset preset changes. Please note: All Riddles with this project preset will adopt any changes you make. Rename a project preset Open a Riddle in a project and go to the Palette or Settings section. Click on the arrow under Project preset , hover over the project you want to rename, and click on the edit icon. Type the new name into the text field and then click on SAVE . Delete a project preset Open a Riddle in a project and go to the Palette or Settings section. Click on the arrow under Project preset , hover over the project you want to rename, and click on the trash can icon. In the popup, click on DELETE PRESET . Please note: If you delete a preset, every Riddle that uses it will keep its current settings locally, but you’ll no longer be able to control them centrally. This action is permanent and cannot be undone. Set a default project preset to a project After creating a project preset, you can set it as a default for an entire project. Click on the down arrow next to the name of the project you're in top left and click on MANAGE PROJECTS . Click on EDIT next to the project you would like to manage. Click on Settings on the sidebar menu. Select a preset from the dropdown menu under Default project preset and click on UPDATE PROJECT . Please note: All Riddles (both existing and new Riddles created in the future) will now have this project preset.",{"id":1616,"path":1617,"dir":1564,"title":1618,"description":9,"keywords":1619,"body":1622},"content:12.Collaboration:4.Transfer a Riddle to a different project.md","/collaboration/transfer-a-riddle-to-a-different-project","Transfer a Riddle to a different project",[1620,1621],"Transfer a Riddle","Move a copy of a Riddle"," Transfer a Riddle to a different project Transfer a Riddle Go to YOUR RIDDLES . Click on the three dots next to your Riddle. Select Transfer . Click on the Select Destination field. Click on the project you want to transfer the Riddle to. Move a copy of a Riddle You can keep the original version, and move a duplicate copy so both projects have your Riddle. Go to YOUR RIDDLES . Click on the three dots next to your Riddle. Select Copy to make a copy of your quiz. Enter the title for the new Riddle. The default is '[Copy] Riddle Name'. Click on COPY & CLOSE . Exit the pop-up box. Go back to YOUR RIDDLES . Click on the three dots next to the copied Riddle. Select Transfer . Click on the Select Destination field. Click on the project you want to transfer the Riddle to.",{"id":1624,"path":1625,"dir":1564,"title":1626,"description":1627,"keywords":1628,"body":1636},"content:12.Collaboration:5.Global Publish settings.md","/collaboration/global-publish-settings","Global \"Publish\" settings","As well as at an individual Riddle level, you can also manage the “Publish” screen for every Riddle in your project. This configuration is possible with the Riddle Enterprise plan.",[1629,1630,1631,1632,1633,1634,1635],"Configure project embed settings","Configure project landing page settings","Configure project save and connect data settings","Configure project data layer settings","Configure project email automation settings","Configure project double opt-in settings","Configure project tracking settings"," Global \"Publish\" settings As well as at an individual Riddle level, you can also manage the “Publish” screen for every Riddle in your project. This configuration is possible with the Riddle Enterprise plan. Configure project embed settings Riddles normally update automatically but this feature will change your original embed settings so you need to copy and paste it again. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > EMBED and then enable Configure global \"Embed\" settings . Enable Boost your SEO/Google ranking to get more traffic to your sites containing your project's Riddles. Your embed codes will include all the text from your Riddle, including questions, answers, and explanations. This will be readable by Google and will help boost your site's SEO ranking. Enable Auto scroll to change the display of your Riddles. Riddles normally jump back to the top after each question. If this is not working for your website, you can try this option. Enable Use a 'sticky' header on your site if your Riddles appears under a header bar on your site. This ensures your Riddles are pushed down that amount so it will always appear below it and be fully visible to your audience. You can then enter a height into the Auto scroll offset field. \nWe recommend starting with 150px and adjusting as needed. Or you can also measure the height of your menu bar in pixels. Chrome has some free extensions like this one . Alternatively, start with 150px and adjust as needed. Change the Max. width if you want to make your Riddles wider or narrower on the sites where they are embedded. We recommend 640px. Our standard embed code will resize automatically for smartphones and tablets. For example, if you set your max width to 1200px (almost full page), your Riddles will still resize automatically to smaller screens. \nPlease note: Resizing only works with JavaScript and CSS enabled. Enable Set fixed height if you want to make your Riddles taller or shorter on the site where it is embedded. You can then enter an iframe height and select the unit from the dropdown menu. Enable Lazy load images to load images 'just in time' before they reach your audience. When it is disabled, all your Riddle images are loaded before letting your audience start the Riddle. Enable Lazy load Riddle to only load your Riddles when it is actually visible to your audience (recommended). This speeds up your pages' load times. When it is disabled, the Riddles load every time the pages load. Enable No JavaScript to removed JavaScript from our embed codes. Riddle embed codes work in 99% of all web tools but this can help if you are still having issues. The downside is your Riddles will not resize automatically to smaller screens. ![global no js]( Enter the height and select the unit from the dropdown menu. Enable No CSS to disable CSS being embedded. Click on APPLY CHANGES or continue making other changes. Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. Copy and paste your embed codes again. Configure project landing page settings Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > LANDING PAGE and then enable Configure global \"Landing page\" settings . Publish on Riddle's landing page is enabled by default to run Riddles on their own landing pages. Enable Full-screen layout on landing page to make the landing page versions of Riddles appear in full-screen view. Click on APPLY CHANGES or continue making other changes. Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. Configure project save and connect data settings Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > SAVE AND CONNECT DATA and then enable Configure \"Save and connect data\" settings . Save and connect data will then be enabled by default. Set up any integration you like under Connect to integrations or add an integration under Add integrations . Click on APPLY CHANGES or continue making other changes. Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. Configure project data layer settings Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > DATA LAYER and then enable Configure \"Data layer\" settings and add data layer items by clicking on ADD ITEM . Enable Submit first block via data layer to allow your audience to submit their answer to the first question, which, once clicked, will then be saved as an answer via the data layer. Enable Change palette via data layer to change the palette via the data layer. Click on APPLY CHANGES or continue making other changes. Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. Configure project email automation settings Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > EMAIL AUTOMATION and then enable Configure \"Email automation\" settings . Enable Enable emal automation , and add your SMTP (optional). Click on APPLY CHANGES . Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. Configure project double opt-in settings Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > DOUBLE OPT-IN (GDPR) and then enable Configure \"Double opt-in (GDPR)\" settings . Enable one of the following double opt-in methods: Double opt-in confirmation email (and enable Save DOI-unconfirmed leads to also save the leads that have not been confirmed yet) Double opt-in via OTP code (email) Double opt-in via OTP code (SMS) Click on APPLY CHANGES or continue making other changes. Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. Configure project tracking settings Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Your projects under COLLABORATION . Click on one of your projects. Click on Global \"Publish\" settings > TRACKING and then enable Configure \"Tracking\" settings and enable the tracking tools required. For any enabled tool, enable custom configuration and which custom events you would like to track (optional). Click on APPLY CHANGES or continue making other changes. Applying the settings can take up to five minutes. ",{"id":1638,"path":1639,"dir":1640,"title":1641,"description":1642,"keywords":1643,"body":1648},"content:13.Accessibility:0.Accessibility statement.md","/accessibility/accessibility-statement","accessibility","Accessibility at Riddle","Riddle is designed to meet level A and AA criteria of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2, the international standard for web accessibility. We continuously work toward improving accessibility across all content types.",[1644,1645,1646,1647],"Our commitment","Accessibility features for your audience","Content types to be aware of","Full accessibility statement"," Accessibility at Riddle Riddle is designed to meet level A and AA criteria of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2, the international standard for web accessibility. We continuously work toward improving accessibility across all content types. Our commitment Riddle partners with accessibility consultants to review and improve the platform. Our teams receive accessibility training, and we consult with users with disabilities during design and development. If you encounter an accessibility issue, our support team responds to accessibility-related requests within two business days. Accessibility features for your audience Screen reader support - Riddle content is built to work with leading screen readers Keyboard navigation - Your audience can navigate through embedded Riddles using the tab key and keyboard controls Hyper-legible font - Use the Atkinson Hyperlegible font (developed by the Braille Institute) for improved readability Customizable color palettes - Adjust colors to meet contrast requirements for your audience Alt text support - Add descriptive alternative text to all images in your Riddles Button highlights and borders - Visual indicators help your audience identify interactive elements Content types to be aware of Some Riddle block types involve visual or drag-and-drop interactions that are inherently harder to make fully accessible: Tap & Find and Spot the Difference rely on visual image interaction and are not fully accessible to screen reader users Drag-and-drop blocks (Order it, Tier List) have limited keyboard support Timers can create barriers for your audience who need more time You can control access to these block types through the Accessibility permission category in user roles , which allows you to restrict the use of less accessible block types for your team. Full accessibility statement Read our complete accessibility statement at riddle.com/resources/accessibility .",{"id":1650,"path":1651,"dir":1640,"title":1652,"description":1653,"keywords":1654,"body":1657},"content:13.Accessibility:1.Accessibility technology.md","/accessibility/accessibility-technology","Accessibility technology","Use Riddle-supported leading accessible technologies, both for Riddle creators and your Riddle audience.",[1655,1656],"Accessible technologies for creators","Accessible technologies for your audience"," Accessibility technology Use Riddle-supported leading accessible technologies, both for Riddle creators and your Riddle audience. Accessible technologies for creators J.A.W.S. (Job Access With Speech) This is the world's leading screenreader. Dragon Text to Speech software This makes text entry for people easier who find typing or other data entry methods difficult. Keyboard navigation This allows you to create Riddles using keyboard commands. ZoomText This easily magnifies text for people with impaired vision. Accessible technologies for your audience Alt-tags Add descriptive text for screen readers to say aloud (visually impaired). Hyper-legible font Use the Braille Institute's Atkinson Hyper-legible font in your Riddles to improve readability through increased letterform distinction. Tab accessibility Your audience can use the tab key to go through your embedded quiz (motor-skill impaired). Button highlights Change the color of a button when selected (visual / motor skills). URL link / button borders Color borders around text hyperlinks and buttons enable better visual definition (visually impaired).",{"id":1659,"path":1660,"dir":1640,"title":1661,"description":1662,"keywords":1663,"body":1665},"content:13.Accessibility:2.Localize your Riddle.md","/accessibility/localize-your-riddle","Localize your Riddle","Riddle is fully localized in 67 languages. To make things easier on your end, every new Riddle you create is automatically localized in your browser's language.\nOur translations only include fixed parts of each Riddle, like the Start or Next buttons, lead fields, as well as result page and social sharing messages (\"I got [score] on this [Riddle]!\").",[1664],"Riddle's languages"," Localize your Riddle Riddle is fully localized in 67 languages. To make things easier on your end, every new Riddle you create is automatically localized in your browser's language.\nOur translations only include fixed parts of each Riddle, like the Start or Next buttons, lead fields, as well as result page and social sharing messages (\"I got [score] on this [Riddle]!\"). If the set language is wrong, you can of course change it. Any default text that was not altered from it's original will change the language to the newly selected language Go to the CREATE step. Go to the Design and Settings section. Go to Language and select a language from the dropdown menu. Go to the Publish section and click on the blue PUBLISH button to push the changes live. Riddle's languages Afaan Oromoo Amharic Arabic Azeri Bengali Bosnian Burmese Croatian Chinese - simplified casual Chinese - simplified formal Chinese - tradition Czech Danish Dutch Estonian Finnish French - formal French - casual Gaelic (Irish) Gaelic (Scottish) Gahuza Gujarti German casual German formal Greek Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Igbo Indonesian Italian Japanese Korean Kyrgyz Latvian Lithuanian Malay Marathi Nepali Norwegian Pashto Persian Pidgin Polish Portuguese (European) Portuguese (Brazlian) Punjabi Russian Serbian (Latin) Sinhala Slovenian Somali Spanish Swahili Swedish Tamul Telugu Thai Tigrinya Turkish Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Welsh Yoruba",{"id":1667,"path":1668,"dir":1640,"title":1669,"description":1670,"keywords":1671,"body":1672},"content:13.Accessibility:3.Website languages.md","/accessibility/website-languages","Website languages","You can view the Riddle website in English or German. The site normally automatically loads in the language based on your default browser language. You can also select the language manually.",[]," Website languages You can view the Riddle website in English or German. The site normally automatically loads in the language based on your default browser language. You can also select the language manually. Go to the main menu in the top right corner. Select German or English from the dropdown menu under CHANGE LANGUAGE .",{"id":1674,"path":1675,"dir":1676,"title":1677,"description":1678,"keywords":1679,"body":1683},"content:14.Custom messaging:0.Company data for emails.md","/custom-messaging/company-data-for-emails","custom-messaging","Company data for emails","Before you can send emails to your leads (e.g. automated emails, double opt-in confirmations, or OTP codes), you must provide your company information. This is required by the CAN-SPAM Act to ensure all outgoing emails contain valid sender information and an unsubscribe mechanism.",[1680,108,1681,1682],"Why this matters","Form fields","Next steps"," Company data for emails Before you can send emails to your leads (e.g. automated emails, double opt-in confirmations, or OTP codes), you must provide your company information. This is required by the CAN-SPAM Act to ensure all outgoing emails contain valid sender information and an unsubscribe mechanism. Why this matters Every email sent through Riddle on your behalf includes your company details in the footer. This is a legal requirement in most countries and helps your leads trust the emails they receive. Without completing this form, email features like automated emails and double opt-in will not work. Setup Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Company data for emails under CUSTOM MESSAGING . Fill out all fields and click on SAVE CHANGES . Form fields Field Description Company name Your company or organization name Contact name The name of the person responsible for emails Address line 1 Your company's street address Address line 2 Additional address information (optional) Zip code Your postal or zip code City Your city Country Select your country from the dropdown Email address Your company's contact email address Phone number Your company's phone number Website URL Your company's website URL Sign Up Reminder A short text reminding recipients why they are receiving the email. This appears in the email footer. Default: \"You are receiving this email because you completed a quiz on our website.\" Next steps Once your company data is saved, you can: Customize your email design to match your brand colors and fonts Set up your own SMTP server to send emails from your own domain Send automated emails to leads after they complete your Riddle",{"id":1685,"path":1686,"dir":1676,"title":1687,"description":1688,"keywords":1689,"body":1690},"content:14.Custom messaging:1.Customize email design.md","/custom-messaging/customize-email-design","Customize email design","You can customize every element of outgoing emails. You can create one design per project.",[]," Customize email design You can customize every element of outgoing emails. You can create one design per project. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on Customize email design under CUSTOM MESSAGING . Under Email background color , click on the box to select a color or enter an RGB code. This is the color for any blank space around the email textbox. Under Email text container color , click on the box to select a color or enter an RGB code. This is the background color for the text container with your email contents and CTA button. Under Email highlight color , click on the box to select a color or enter an RGB code. This is the color for the line that border the top and left of your email. Under Email font , select a font from the dropdown menu. This is the font for your email content. Under Email font color , click on the box to select a color or enter an RGB code. This is the color for the text in your email. Under Email button background color , click on the box to select a color or enter an RGB code. This is the color of the CTA button under your email content. Under Email button font , select a font from the dropdown menu. This is the font for the CTA button that is under your email content. Under Email button text color , click on the box to select a color or enter an RGB code. This is the color for the text on the CTA button in your email. Click on CREATE DESIGN (for the first time you edit the design) / SAVE CHANGES (for all subsequent edits), and then click on SEND TEST EMAIL . Look at your new email design in your inbox. ",{"id":1692,"path":1693,"dir":1676,"title":1694,"description":1695,"keywords":1696,"body":1700},"content:14.Custom messaging:2.SMTP.md","/custom-messaging/smtp","SMTP","You can set up all emails to your leads to come from you, rather than from Riddle. You can configure one SMTP server per project.",[1697,1698,1699],"Set up your custom connection with basic authentication","Set up your connection with Microsoft OAuth","Set up Gmail with SMTP"," SMTP You can set up all emails to your leads to come from you, rather than from Riddle. You can configure one SMTP server per project. Set up your custom connection with basic authentication Fill out your company data for emails to comply with the CAN-SPAM Act. Once you have filled out the CAN-SPAM Act form, go to the left menu bar, and click on SMTP . If you need to go to SMTP from somewhere else in Riddle, go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on SMTP under CUSTOM MESSAGING . Click on Choose SMTP gateway and select Custom SMTP connection with basic authentication . Click on Advanced settings (port & encryption mode) . Fill out all fields. Here is a list of the most common SMTP information: Mail provider Host (SMTP server) Security Port common default 2 TLS 587 common default 3 SSL 465 smtp.gmail.com SSL 465 Outlook.com smtp-mail.outlook.com TLS 587 Office365.com smtp.mail.office365.com TLS 587 Yahoo Mail smtp.mail.yahoo.com SSL 465 Yahoo UK smtp.mail.yahoo.co.uk SSL 465 Yahoo AU/NZ smtp.mail.yahoo.com.au SSL 465 AT&T smtp.att.yahoo.com SSL 465 AOL smtp.aol.com TLS 587 BT Internet mail.btinternet.com none 25 Hotmail smtp.live.com SSL 465 T-Online securesmtp.t-online.de TLS 587 GMX.de smtp.gmx.com SSL 465 Wanadoo UK smtp.wanadoo.co.uk none 25 Click on CREATE YOUR SMTP GATEWAY , or on SAVE SMTP GATEWAY SETTINGS if you are updating your SMTP. You will receive a test email. Set up your connection with Microsoft OAuth Microsoft requires some additional configuration and a complex setup in order to function properly. Please follow the outlined steps exactly and contact the Riddle support in case of any issues. Fill out your company data for emails to comply with the CAN-SPAM Act if you haven't done so already. Go to the main menu in the top right corner and click on SMTP under CUSTOM MESSAGING . Click on Choose SMTP gateway and select Microsoft OAuth . In the redirect that appears, enter your Microsoft business account login details. This only works with a Microsoft business account. In the permission redirect, enter any reason to request access to that SMTP account. Once done, you will get a confirmation that access was requested. You need to confirm to go back to the Riddle Creator.\nIf your microsoft organization does not allow user-authorized enterprise apps and you do not have the right permission, you might need additional consent from an administrator After the redirect back to Riddle, you will see a URL. This URL need to be copied and sent to your Mail Administrator. All they need to do is click on it to finish the setup.\nYour admin needs to confirm the requested permissions again. You will get a notification email once your admin has confirmed the setup. This notification email contains a link to re-authenticate your account. Only after this was done, your account is properly set up. Set up Gmail with SMTP Go to your Google account and log in. Type App passwords into the Search Google Account field and select App passwords from the list of options. Log in to your account if prompted. Enter a name into the App name field, e.g. Riddle, and click on Create . In the pop-up that appears, copy the app password, including the spaces, and click on Done . In Riddle, go to SMTP . Click on Advanced setting (port & encryption mode) . Enter your email in the Username field, paste the Google password you just created in into the Password field, and fill out all other fields. The Host , Port , and Encryption should be as follows: Host: smtp.gmail.com. \nPort: 465 \nEncryption: SSL Click on CREATE YOUR SMTP GATEWAY . You will receive a test email from Google. ",1776170016723]